JP2021194153A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can make a game progress preferable.SOLUTION: A slot machine 10 starts rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R on the basis of an operation of a start lever 41 after a bet operation. Operations of stop switches 42-44 then stop respective reels, a stop symbol combination according to a lottery result is stopped, and a put-out of medals is carried out. When the bet operation is carried out, a bet process performance is executed on a bet display 34, and a bet corresponding performance which displays a bet number set on the basis of the bet operation is carried out. When the start lever 41 is operated in a situation in which the bet corresponding performance is executed, restriction processing of the bet corresponding performance is carried out.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, an internal lottery is performed, the reel starts to rotate, and the reel stops during the rotation. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, in the gaming machines illustrated above, it is necessary to optimize the progress of the gaming, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of optimizing the progress of a game.

The present invention
Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the design of each orbital body, and
A start operation means for performing a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiters, and a start operation means.
A stop operation means for performing a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiters, and a stop operation means.
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. The drive control means to be executed and
A bet number operation means for performing a bet number operation for setting a game bet number, and
A bet number setting means for setting a game bet number based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, and a bet number setting means.
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player according to a bet number set by the bet number setting means based on the operation of the start operation means, and a lottery means.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
After executing the specific notification when the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed, the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set based on the bet number operation is executed by the specific notification means. Number notification means and
It is characterized by comprising a specific processing means for executing a specific process that can limit the executed specific notification when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is executed. And.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the game progress more suitable.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 2 bets. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop switch, and the winning mode which is established. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a bonus state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section transition lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the normal AT mode lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the AT mode lottery process for CZ. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a precursor mode. It is a figure which shows an example of various transition lottery tables. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. It is a figure which shows an example of the immediate notification lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ mode game number table and the precursor effect game number table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT addition. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop switch, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of an instruction monitor and a section display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the push order notification effect performed in the auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pushing order notification. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for advantageous section transition game. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the transition relation of a display mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the start game and the end game of an advantageous section, and the display of a section display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the game state display part and the bet display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for BET. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting a re-game. It is a flowchart which shows the medal insertion correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st operation correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd operation correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a game state display part. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of betting. It is a flowchart which shows the single bet effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous bet effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the bet effect setting process for a replay state. It is a flowchart which shows the normal re-game bet effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific re-game bet effect setting process. It is a timing chart for explaining how the pseudo-bet effect is restricted. It is a timing chart for explaining how the pseudo-bet effect is restricted. It is a flowchart which shows the standby state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process. It is a timing chart for explaining a temporary standby state and a standby state. It is a timing chart for demonstrating how the pseudo bet effect is limited in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the specific re-game bet effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific re-game bet effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific re-game bet effect setting process. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the start-time effect and the pseudo-bet effect in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the specific re-game bet effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific re-game bet effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the push order notification effect. It is a flowchart which shows the specific re-game bet effect setting process in the modification 3. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the pseudo bet effect and the freeze effect. It is a flowchart which shows the freeze lottery process. It is a timing chart for explaining the pseudo bet effect according to the type of a bet number operation in the modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the specific re-game bet effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting state setting process in the modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process. It is a timing chart for explaining a temporary standby state and a standby state. It is a flowchart which shows the medal return process in the modification 6. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing at the time of return. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the settlement of credits and the pseudo-bet effect. It is a flowchart which shows the specific re-game bet effect setting process in the modification 7.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by driving a nail to a so-called island facility at the time of installation in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side portion when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened and closed by the rotation of the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is in a locked state that cannot be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured to release the locked state by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 sets the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output an exciting pulse of 25 pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are designed so that the main control device 101 can be visually recognized from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the first of the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 0th of the left reel 32L), and a "red 7" symbol (for example, the 14th of the left reel 32L). "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), "Akakai" symbol (for example, 4th on left reel 32L), "Shirakai" symbol (for example, left) There are 10 types of reel 32L (19th). And, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that out of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels, 3 symbols can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R among the symbols that can be visually recognized. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops on the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of each symbol that stops at the lower right line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which a bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, when a line that is activated by a medal bet and a line that is not activated are set and the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the valid line, As a winning result, a privilege that a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, are paid out is given, and a privilege that the game state is changed is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize is not established and the above privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, among the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, there are cases where three medals are bet and the game is started, and cases where two medals are bet and the game is started, and these three or two medals are started. When a medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as a valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as valid lines. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. Further, in the following, a game in which three medals are bet and started is a three-bet game, a game in which two medals are bet and started is a two-bet game, and one medal is bet and started. The game is also called a one-bet game. In this embodiment, the 1-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first small winning combination is won. If the first small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the symbols corresponding to the first small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established.

If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second small winning combination is won. If the second small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the symbols corresponding to the second small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above first small winning combination due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned. It is also understandable that is established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the third small It will be a winning role. If the third small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the symbol corresponding to the third small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination are awarded. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fourth small winning combination is awarded. If the 4th small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11D, when the symbol corresponding to the 4th small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the “bell” symbol is aligned and stopped on the right-up line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 3rd small winning combination winnings. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth small winning combination is awarded. If the fifth small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the fifth small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 4th small winning combination winning. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the sixth small winning combination is awarded. If the sixth small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbol is placed on the lower row of the left reel 32L, the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row of the right reel 32R, respectively. Stops (stops in a small mountain shape). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the stop position of the "bell" symbol, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 5th small winning combination winning. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

"Bell" design on the left reel 32L, "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "Akakai" design or "youth" design on the middle reel 32M, and "white 7" design, "white shell" on the right reel 32R. If the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML, the 7th small winning combination will be won. If the 7th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 3 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12 (a), when the symbol corresponding to the 7th small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the 8th small winning combination is awarded. If the 8th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 3 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the symbols corresponding to the 8th small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above 7th small winning combination due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that is established.

The 9th to 32nd small roles are so-called missing roles, in which a prize is established when the 1st to 6th small roles are missed. When the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small roles are the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Akakai" symbol, "white clam" symbol, "youth" symbol or "bell" on the left reel 32L. "White 7" design, "Cherry" design, "Akakai" design, "Youth" design, "Red 7" design, "Watermelon" design, "Replay" design, "BAR" design, "BAR" design "Bell" or "white clam" design and right reel 32R "red 7" design, "white 7" design, "white shell" design, "youth" design, "water clam" design, "red shell" design, "BAR" The winning is established when the corresponding combination of the symbol or the "replay" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, all of the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the 9th small winning combination prize to the 32nd small winning combination winning are stopped with the "bell" symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no small winning combination, and it is easy to understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the configuration in which medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned first small winning combination prize to 32nd small winning combination winning, the paid out small winning combination is a kind of privilege given according to the result of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as a payout rate, and the ratio of the number of payout medals (payouts) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as a payout rate. In some cases.

There are 1st re-game prize to 12th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that can play the next game without inserting a medal is given. As shown in FIG. 10, a winning symbol combination is set for each of the first re-game to the twelfth re-game.

The first replay is the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol or "youth" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol and the symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay prize corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. When the symbol corresponding to the second replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), the "BAR" symbols are aligned on the right-up line L5 and stopped, or as shown in FIG. 14 (b). As described above, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are stopped in order from the left on the upward-sloping line L5. When the second re-game winning is established, the transition to the gaming state does not occur, but the transition to the notification mode advantageous to the player occurs, and the first AT state as a so-called pseudo-bonus starts.

In the third replay, the effective line ML is the "bell" symbol, "ark shell" symbol or "youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. If you stop at the top, you will win a prize. When the symbol corresponding to the third replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), the "white 7" symbol is aligned on the lower line L3 and stopped, or as shown in FIG. 14 (d). As such, the "Red 7" symbol is aligned on the downward-sloping line L4 and stops. When the third re-game winning is established, the transition to the gaming state does not occur, but the transition to the notification mode advantageous to the player occurs, and the second AT state as a so-called pseudo-bonus starts.

The fourth re-game and the fifth re-game are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games are won in duplicate.

The sixth replay is the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "cherry" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the 6th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

The 7th replay consists of the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "ark shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. Alternatively, a prize is established when the "Akakai" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the 7th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R, while the middle. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the 7th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

The eighth replay is the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "ark shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. And, the prize is established when it stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

In the ninth replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), when the symbol corresponding to the 9th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called middle stage replay tempai is stopped.

The tenth replay consists of the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. The prize is established when the "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Shirakai" symbol or "Youth" symbol stop on the effective line ML. In the 12th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are effective. A prize is established when the player stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 13 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the 10th re-game prize or the 12th re-game prize is stopped on the effective line ML, a "cherry" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. If you have won the 10th re-game or the 12th re-game, if you aim at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R and perform a stop operation, the "cherry" symbol will stop in the upper row in the case of the 10th re-game winning. However, in the case of the 12th re-game prize, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower stage, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game prize and the 12th re-game prize. In the eleventh re-game, the prize is established when the tenth re-game and the twelfth re-game cannot be won, that is, when the omission may occur.

There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed.

If the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first BB prize is awarded. When the first BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13 (e), when the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning stop on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

If the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second BB prize is awarded. When the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the second BB winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

The stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges the medal to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for paying out medals (not shown), and pays out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated while the medals inserted in the medal slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as a game medium at a time. 56 is provided. The specific number of sheets is set according to the progress of the game. For example, if the specified number of cards in the game is set to 3 and the specific number is set to 3, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number of cards is set to 2 and the specified number of cards is set to 2, two cards are inserted on condition that there are credits. When the virtual medal is inserted and the specified number is set to 3 or 2, and the specific number is set to 3, the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. The first is when three virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there is a credit, the specified number is set as three or two, and the specific number is set as two. When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, if there is no specific number of credits, virtual medals are inserted by the amount of the credits. For example, if the specific number of medals is set to 3 and the credit is 2, 2 virtual medals are inserted.

Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, pay attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting the medal by the player, whereas the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 merely involve the operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. The slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch because one virtual medal is inserted.

The operation surface of the first credit insertion switch 56 is set to be larger than that of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the operability of the first credit insertion switch 56 is larger than that of the second credit insertion switch 57. Better than. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit input switch 56 to proceed with the game. That is, normally, it is considered that the game is played by throwing in a set specific number of sheets out of the specified number of sheets.

The first credit insertion switch 56 is provided with a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for detecting that the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated, and the second credit insertion switch 57 is provided with the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a. A second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for detecting that the two credit insertion switch 57 has been operated is provided, and the operation of each credit insertion switch 56, 57 is detected by each of the credit insertion detection sensors 56a, 57a. (See FIG. 15). Further, the first credit input switch 56 has a built-in first credit lamp 56b. The first credit lamp 56b is configured to be switchable between a lighting state and an extinguishing state, and by setting the first credit lamp 56b to a lighting state, the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is promoted. In addition, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is in a lighting state in which the operation is possible, a configuration in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is in a blinking state may be used.

An effect switch 66 operated when an effect is generated is provided on the right side of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57.

A clearing switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the clearing switch 59 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the clearing switch 59 constitutes a clearing operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, there is a push order indicator that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a push order display that notifies the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 is provided, which has a section display for showing an advantageous section, which is a section in which the winning rate of the small winning combination is changed and the game can be advanced in a situation advantageous to the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the left side of the credit display unit 60, operations of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 and medals to the medal insertion slot 45 are performed. A BET display unit 75 as a first display unit for displaying the number of bets of the game set by the input, and a game state display unit 76 showing the progress state of the current game are provided.

Further, on the left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, a bet display unit 34 as a second display unit for displaying the bet number of the above game is provided. Further, on the right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R in the game panel 25, there is a state (wait state) in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R should wait until the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the start of the game. A weight display unit 35 for notifying is provided.

The BET display unit 75, the game state display unit 76, the bet display unit 34, and the weight display unit 35 will be described in detail later.

At the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up and blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game with each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is called an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

In the front door 12, below the gaming panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, the model name of the gaming machine is described, and a lower display unit 69 constituting a predetermined display screen is provided. There is. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display unit, the lower display unit 69 may be provided with an operation button for effect, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hole manager or the like to adjust the medal output. That is, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that comprehensively manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a combination ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the gaming state advantageous to the player and the non-advantageous state. The role ratio monitor 77 is a main control device so that it can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12, and cannot be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. The 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine, and more specifically, in the board box so that the display surface of the role ratio monitor 77 can be visually recognized via the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is contained. By the way, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 is invisible even from the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. Unless the front door 12 is opened, it is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77. The combination monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and medals to be paid out from the hopper device 51. The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the clearing switch 59. Clearing detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of, reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on, etc. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via the input / output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than, for example, 10 volt. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit Information on the display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the BET display unit 75, the game status display unit 76, the role ratio monitor 77, the display control device 81, the hall management device (not shown), and the like. An external centralized terminal board 121 or the like capable of transmitting is connected via an input / output port 104.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the data, the standby storage area 106c for storing the state before shifting to the demo state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including the power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by the power failure process (see FIG. 17), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to input a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and a bet display unit 34, a weight display unit 35, and a first credit lamp 56b are connected to the output side. The upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are connected. Then, the bet display unit 34, the weight display unit 35, the first credit lamp 56b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that centrally manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) or the like is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the power failure processing will be outlined.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting the subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the fact that the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power has been restored from the power failure state. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the power failure signal is continuously output, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the input medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor whether or not. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, 68, and the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like is performed. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the start pre-processing, the display control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, BET processing is performed.

In the BET process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed. Specifically, for example, if a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a re-game prize is established in a two-bet game, two medals are automatically inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting the virtual medal of.

In the process of automatically inserting virtual medals, the virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. When none of the re-game winnings is established, the process of setting the bet number is performed based on the bet number operation such as the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 and the medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 45. The BET process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S205, it is confirmed whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, and if an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state. At the same time, perform anomaly processing to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After executing the abnormality processing, in step S206, a medal return processing is performed in which the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out based on the operation of the clearing switch 59.

After executing the medal return process, in step S207, as a result of the BET process in step S204, the number of bets on the medals has reached the specified number, and the start operation for starting the game can be accepted. Determine if it exists. In the slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number of sheets in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified number of sheets in the gaming state other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative judgment is made in step S207 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3" except in the bonus state. In step S207, an affirmative determination is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the bonus state, if the medal is not bet, or if the bet number is "1" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S207. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number and the startable state is not reached, the process returns to the BET process in step S204.

When it is in the startable state, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 is operated to perform the start operation. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the BET process in step S204.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so that the game is started. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, the game state display unit process is executed in step S209. Such a process is a process for controlling the display of the game state display unit 76 based on the game start operation, and the details thereof will be described later together with the description of the game state display unit 76.

In the following step S210, a valid line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as a valid line is performed. That is, only the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S211 the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S212, the reel control process of step S213, the medal payout process of step S214, and the standby state setting process of step S215 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is successful is selected. The slot machine 10 has a normal game state and a bonus state as game states, and a lottery table is set for each game state. Then, in the normal game state, since the specified number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state is the lottery table in the 3-bet game. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets, and the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the lottery table for the normal gaming state is selected. Then, when the current game is a 3-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select a lottery table for normal game states (FIG. 21). Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the processing related to the setting of the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after the initialization process. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 for each operation of the start lever 41. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated once, "setting 1" → "setting 2". → Update the setting values so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is also updated each time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off is regarded as the operation for confirming the set value, the set value at that time is set as the current set value, and the setting process of the winning probability is completed. do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 also ends. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set value.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for a normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state in a 3-bet game. Further, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for a normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state in a two-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether or not the combination is appropriate is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The determination value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate. In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV affirmed in step S305 to the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the 7th small winning combination winning flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set in step S306. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26, in step S306. Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is set. If you have not won, the corresponding winning flag will not be set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, for example, the first BB winning flag is not set. Further, in the state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small winning combination winning flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, and the 10th small winning combination are carried over. Set the winning combination flag and the 13th small winning combination flag.

In addition, a lottery table in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over is separately prepared, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed by the separately prepared lottery table. It may be configured to perform. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB and the second BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 20, that is, when the game is played in the 3-bet game in the normal gaming state, the probability of winning the normal lip A (when IV = 1). The probability of winning is about 1 in 27.3 in setting 1, about 1 in 27.5 in setting 3, and about 1 in 28.3 in setting 6, and the set values are The higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning the normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning the normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value. It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the chance A (the probability of winning when IV = 4) is about 1/164 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV = 5). The probability of winning is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. It is set so that the chance eye B is easier to win than the chance eye C, and the chance eye A is easier to win than the chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV = 7) is about 1/107 in setting 1, about 1/104 in setting 3, and about 93.6 in setting 6. It is a fraction, and it is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV = 8) is about 1/215 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 9). (Probability of becoming) is about 1/13100 regardless of the set value, and is set so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. .. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle forward push bell 1, middle forward push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the pinch bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value. Regardless of each, it is about 1/184. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the first BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other roles (replay, small role, IV = 1 to 1). It is set higher than the winning probability of 24). In the 3-bet game, it is set not to win the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) or the second BB (IV = 26) (0 is set in the corresponding point value PV). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any of the roles including the first BB is 0. In the situation where the first BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the first BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 3-bet game, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected excluding the increase in the first BB state (net increase number minus about 1.77).

On the other hand, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 21, that is, when the game is played in the 2-bet game in the normal gaming state, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, and the normal lip C are used. , Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 1-9) is played in the above 3-bet game. It is the same probability as the probability of the case. The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. It is set to be. The push order bell (IV = 11-22) is set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1 of 257 regardless of the set value, and it is set so that it is harder to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. Has been done. In the 2-bet game, it is set so that the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/181 regardless of the set value. Further, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV = 25) is set not to be won, while the second BB (IV = 26) is set to be won, and the probability is not related to the set value. It is about 1 / 4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any of the roles including the second BB is 0. In the situation where the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the two-bet game is about 1/4.95 (for the second BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 2-bet game, a decrease of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected excluding the increase of the second BB (net increase number minus about 0.64).

After setting the winning flag in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the gaming state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, the lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process for setting a stoptable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of this game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information according to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, the push order bell 1 is won (winning when IV = 11), and the 1st small winning combination winning flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, the 10th small winning combination winning flag, and the 13th small winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the first small combination, the ninth small combination, the tenth small combination, and the thirteenth small combination winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, if the watermelon is won (winning when IV = 23) and the 7th small winning combination flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination will be displayed. Stop symbol information is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped.

In the slot machine 10, the first BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 3-bet game, and the second BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 2-bet game. Therefore, even when the first BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information for establishing the first BB prize is set. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the first BB prize is set). Further, even when the second BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information for establishing the second BB prize is set. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the second BB prize is set).

In the following step S313, when a plurality of stoptable symbol information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles are won among the small roles, replays, and bonus roles, the priorities shown below are set. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the small winning combination is given priority, and if the small winning combination cannot be established, the bonus winning is established, and the priority is set. .. If the replay and bonus are won, the priority is set so that the replay prize is prioritized and established.

For example, in the situation where the 1st BB is won (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the 1st BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1st BB winning, the 7th small role and the 7th. When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8 small winning combination is set, the priority is set so that the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination are prioritized over the 1st BB winning. In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal Lip A is further won, the 2nd BB winning and the 1st replay are performed. , When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd re-game, the 3rd re-game and the 4th re-game prize is set, priority is given so that each re-game prize is prioritized over the 2nd BB prize. Set the ranking.

Here, when the re-game is won, the combination of the winning symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will always win the prize. In other words, if the re-game is won, the re-game prize will always be established and no omission will occur. Therefore, when the stop symbol information between the re-game and the bonus is set, the re-game prize for any of the set re-games is always established, and the bonus prize is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, the section display first process is executed in step S314, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the combination monitor 77, and such a process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S213 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect processing is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In the following step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not the wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) as a predetermined specific period has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotation in the previous game, and if not, it has not elapsed. Wait until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Therefore, even if the player bets a predetermined number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start processing. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to know which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when the player wins when IV = 11 to 22, that is, when the push order bell is won (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 that generates a stop command is generated. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of ~ 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → right. When the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, the stop information is set so that the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination is established, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In that case, the stop information is set so that the third small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The design arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by a maximum of four symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the spacing between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that sections separated by 5 or more symbols are formed, it is necessary for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

A case where the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right will be described as an example. In such a case, as described above, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination.

The 17th small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol and a "BAR" symbol. Further, the 18th small role symbol in the left reel 32L is a "Akakai" symbol and a "Shirakai" symbol. The 21st small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. The 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, any one of the 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol is on the effective line (middle stage) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In the slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so that the symbols with a small number of sliding frames are stopped at the effective line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the fourth "ark shell" symbol (2) which is the 18th small winning combination symbol. Komasuberi) and the 5th "replay" symbol (3 frames), which is the 21st small role symbol, can be stopped in the middle row, while the 4th "Akakai" symbol with the smallest number of slip frames is in the middle row. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th small winning combination, the 17th small winning combination and the 21st small winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th small winning combination symbol of the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the 18th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 18th small winning combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, the stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43.

The 18th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white shell" symbol and a "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol is 5 or more. That is, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th small role symbol "white shell" symbol or "youth" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that can be stopped in the upper row, the 18th small winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that cannot be stopped in the upper row, so-called omission. It becomes.

Here, when the "Akakai" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops in the upper row of the middle reel 32M, the 18th small is won by winning the middle forward push bell 1 as described above. In addition to the possibility that the winning combination will be established, there is also the possibility that the 20th small winning combination will be established by winning the middle forward push bell 2. That is, as for the 20th small winning combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are common to the 18th small winning combination symbol. Then, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small role symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol, while the 20th small role symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol, which are different. ing. In particular, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small winning combination symbol and the 20th small winning combination symbol are the 20th small winning combination symbol when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 18th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line. Cannot be stopped at the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 20th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line, the 18th small winning combination symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. Each of these symbols is arranged in. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle forward push bell 1 is won or the middle forward push bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped and the 18th small winning combination is won. And even if it is a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th small winning combination, it is not possible to aim for it and win a prize.

Next, a case where one middle forward push bell is won and each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the order of middle → left → right will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the third small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "replay" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "replay" symbol is stopped at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "ark shell" symbol, which are the third small role symbols, are arranged so that the distance between these symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" symbol or the "ark shell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the third small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, the first small winning combination is won regardless of the operation timing. When 2 small winning combination, 3rd small winning combination, 4th small winning combination, 5th small winning combination, or 6th small winning combination is established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the same. Depending on the operation timing, the small winning combination will be established, or none of the small winning combination will be established and will be missed. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, the 1st small role prize, the 2nd small role prize, the 3rd small role prize, the 4th small role prize, the 5th small role prize , Or the 6th small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the valid line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the valid line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the bonus state process is executed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state processing, the winning result correspondence processing is performed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result handling process, the section display second process is executed in step S416. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the medal payout process in step S214 will be outlined.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-gaming prize to the twelfth re-game winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes are established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes is established, the processing to store the information of the winning re-game result is performed. Finish the medal payout process. In the BET process (step S204), a process of automatically placing a bet based on the re-game winning is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for paying medals is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether or not these are the first BB state and the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It can be discriminated. That is, in step S501, when neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the first BB state and the second BB state are not set, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not one of the BBs has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set, the bonus state processing ends as it is. If any of the BB winning flags are set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to the MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated while 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of cards in the game, in a situation where two or three cards are set as the specified number of cards in the game, the second credit insertion switch 57 may be operated. It is permissible to play a two-bet game by inserting two medals from the medal slot 45. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any of the BB prizes are not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any of the BB winnings is established, the process proceeds to step S505, and it is determined whether or not the first BB winning is established.

If the first BB prize is established, in step S506, the process of inputting "46" to the BB counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the upper limit payout number in each BB state. That is, by inputting "46" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 46 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, from the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S501. In the following step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the first BB state is started, and the display control device 81 that has received the first BB start command starts the first BB state. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to the above is performed. Further, in the display control device 81, by receiving the first BB start command, it becomes possible to grasp that the first BB state is from the next game, and the speaker 64 or the like so that the effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of games in the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the specified number of games is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in the 3-bet game.

The initial values of the specified bets are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified bets are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the first BB prize has not been established is the case where the second BB prize has been established. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511 and the process of inputting "2" to the BB counter is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when two or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, a process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, a process of setting the second BB state flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the second BB state is started. The display control device 81 that has received the second BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the effect for the 2BB state is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to the extent that the player can identify them. Further, the appearance and contents of the production for the first BB state and the production for the second BB state are different to the extent that the player can identify them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. That is, not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, the specified number of games is set to three, and the second BB state is performed in the three-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515 to perform processing in the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for BB state. In the present embodiment, the lottery table common to the first BB state and the second BB state is used, but a separate lottery table is provided for each, and the types of winning combinations and the winning probability of each winning combination are different. You may. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the normal lip A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a normal Lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 / 61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about. It is 1/9.02, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card combination (probability of winning when IV = 24) is about 1/78. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of losing the winning combination is about 1/3.13. In this case, a decrease of about 0.96 medals can be expected per game (net increase minus about 0.96).

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and the 1st BB state that can be transferred in the 3-bet game, the main medal increase is the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination in which 13 medals are paid out. In the normal game state, it is a push order bell, and in the first BB state, it is a common bell. Comparing the winning rates of these main small wins, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain operation order in the normal game state, the winning rate is about 1/19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, a prize is won with a probability of about 1/9.03, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that the prize is more likely to occur than the normal game state. In addition, in the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transferred in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and in the normal game state, the probability is about 1/964. In the 2nd BB state, there is a 1/9.0 chance of winning a prize, and even in a 2-bet game, the 2nd BB state is more likely to win a prize than the normal game state. It is set.

However, as mentioned above, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, since the lottery table in which the medals can be reduced in each game is adopted, the increase in the number of medals held even if the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are exhausted will increase. It cannot be expected, and conversely, it is assumed that the number of medals held will decrease by digesting the first BB state and the second BB state.

In the bonus state processing, in step S515, as a result of the lottery processing by the above-mentioned BB state lottery table and each reel control, it is determined whether or not any small winning combination is established in this game. If the prize is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning is established, the process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counters of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S516. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter becomes 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516. For example, if the common bell is won in the 2nd BB state and the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination are established, 13 cards will be paid out. Therefore, in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter and the BB counter is 0. It becomes as follows.

If it is determined in step S517 that the value is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is 0 or less, in step S518, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed. That is, if it is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, the process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed in step S519, and the BB end command corresponding to the BB state to be ended this time is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S520. More specifically, the first BB end command is output and set when the first BB state is terminated, and the second BB end command is output and set when the second BB state is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the effect for ending the first BB and the effect for ending the second BB are performed.

After that, in step S521, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3, and then the bonus state processing ends. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal gaming state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is played. The game will be played at. That is, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the game is set so that the game can be easily played in the 2-bet game. By the way, after the end of the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, so that 3 bets cannot be made by operating the 1st credit insertion switch 56, and in order to play a 3-bet game, It is necessary to insert three medals from the medal slot 45.

Here, in the slot machine 10, the playability using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 26.

In the initial state in which the RAM 106 is initialized (cleared), the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set, and in a normal gaming state (non-internal state) in which no BB is won. be. In this case, as described above, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game is a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, in the 3-bet game, the 1st BB can be won, but the 2nd BB cannot be won, and in the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB can be won, but the 1st BB cannot be won. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, basically, the winning of the second BB may occur in the two-bet game.

If the first BB or the second BB is won and the winning game is not successful, the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over (internal state). Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified number of bets (specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game is a 3-bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the first BB is won, the first BB prize can be established in the 3-bet game, while the first BB prize cannot be established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. Further, in the internal state in which the second BB is won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the second BB winning cannot be established in the 3-bet game, while the second BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game. Will be done. That is, if the first BB is won in the 3-bet game, the first BB prize can be established if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, but if the first BB is won and then the 2-bet game is switched to, the first BB prize is won. Cannot be established. In addition, if the 2nd BB is won in the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB winning can be established if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, but if the 2nd BB is won and then the 3-bet game is switched to, the 2nd BB winning is achieved. Cannot be established. Then, the first BB and the second BB are not won in duplicate, and in a situation where the first BB is carried over, the first BB is not won again, and the second BB is not won in duplicate. In addition, in the situation where the second BB winning is carried over, the second BB will not be won again, and the first BB will not be won in duplicate. That is, if the game is played in the 2-bet game when the 1st BB is won, the game in the internal state where the 1st BB winning is carried over continues endlessly, and when the 2nd BB is won, the game is played in the 3-bet game. Then, the game in the internal state carrying over the second BB winning will continue endlessly.

Here, since the 1st BB winning is established only in the 3-bet game and the 2nd BB winning is established only in the 2-bet game as described above, 3 in the situation where the 2nd BB winning is carried over. Even if the result is not won in any of the roles in the bet game, the 2nd BB prize will not be established, and if the result is lost in the 2-bet game in the situation where the 1st BB winning is carried over. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it becomes possible to dramatically simplify the winning combination and the control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the internal state in which the first BB winning and the second BB winning are carried over. If the configuration is such that the 2nd BB winning can be established in the 3-bet game, or the 1st BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game, the internal state in which the 1st BB winning or the 2nd BB winning is carried over is carried over. This is because, when trying to continue, it is necessary to make a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a role that may be missed, it is necessary to win another role at the time of the drop.

Further, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main role of increasing medals is a common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role of increasing medals in the 2-bet game is the common bell, while the main role of increasing the medals in the 3-bet game is the push order bell. .. For the common bell, any of the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, whereas for the push order bell, the prize is established. , The small winning combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44. In other words, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game are wider than the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, depending on the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the push order bell is won. Is big. Then, for example, the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation order (FIG. 25) from the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination when the push order bell is won. By switching between the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

Then, in the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, first, in the non-internal state, the game is played in a 2-bet game, and the second BB is won in the 2-bet game. When the second BB is won, the internal state is set, and the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated is switched to the 3-bet game, and the game proceeds in a state where the winning second BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB winning, and generally, the 2nd BB winning is carried over inside. The game in the state will be continued.

In the slot machine 10, the first BB winning flag is stored in the normal area in the various flag storage areas 106d, whereas the second BB winning flag is stored in the storage area in the various flag storage areas 106d. It is configured to be. The normal area is an area in which various general flags such as winning flags of other roles are stored. Each flag stored in the normal area is stored and held by the backup power or the like even if the power supply to the slot machine 10 is stopped (even if the power is turned off). Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off when the game hall is closed, if the power is turned on the next day, the slot machine 10 is started while the various flags stored in the normal area are stored, and the first BB is won. Even if the power is turned on / off with the flag set, the slot machine 10 is started with the first BB winning flag set. However, when the winning probability setting process is activated (when the setting is changed) when the slot machine 10 is started up, the normal area initialization process (clear process) is performed. Therefore, when the winning probability setting process is performed, the first BB winning flag is cleared together with other flags stored in these normal areas.

On the other hand, the storage area is an area in which only the second BB winning flag is stored. Similar to the above-mentioned normal area, the flag stored in the storage area is not cleared by turning the power ON / OFF. Further, in the storage area, even if the winning probability setting process is activated when the slot machine 10 is started up, the storage area initialization process is not performed (it is excluded from the initialization process). ). Therefore, even if the winning probability setting process is performed, the second BB winning flag stored in the storage area is not cleared and is retained (saved). That is, when the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of the first BB winning in which the first BB winning flag is stored, the first BB winning flag is cleared and the operation is started as a non-internal state. , If the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of the 2nd BB winning in which the 2nd BB winning flag is stored, the 2nd BB winning flag is not cleared and the operation is started in the internal state of the 2nd BB winning. To. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game in the internal state in which the second BB winning is carried over, not only when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on / off, but also when the setting is changed.

Then, in order to play the game in the internal state that carries over the second BB winning, basically, the game may be played until the second BB is won in the 2-bet game at the time of factory shipment of the slot machine 10. The second BB winning will be stored and retained until the reset switch 72 is operated and the RAM clearing process is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably carry out the game in a state where the second BB winning is carried over.

Hereinafter, on the premise of a game in which the second BB winning is carried over, the game performance using the notification (pushing order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell in the game (also referred to as a normal game in the following explanation) is provided. explain.

<Processing for lottery results>
First, the lottery result correspondence process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The lottery result correspondence process is a process performed after the lottery process of each game is performed, and is a process of performing a shift lottery to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in step S601, a process of grasping the current gaming state is performed. More specifically, it is either the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, or it is the non-internal state (normal gaming state) before the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, or the internal state after the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won. Know if it is (carry-over state). In the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, 3 is set as the specified number of sheets (specified bet number), and in the non-internal state before the winning of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and in the internal state after the winning of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB. 2 and 3 are set as the specified number of sheets (specified number of bets). Then, in step S602, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is one specified number (specified specified number) specified in the state grasped in step S601. In the present embodiment, the specified number of bets in the first BB state and the second BB state is set to 3, and in this case, since the specified number of bets in the first BB state and the second BB state is 3, the first BB in step S601. When it is determined that the state is the state or the second BB state, an affirmative determination is always made in step S602. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the states other than the first BB state and the second BB state, 3 out of 2 and 3 of the specified number of sheets is set as the specified specified number, and other than the first BB state and the second BB state. When the number of bets is 3 in the state of, affirmative determination is made in step S602. In this case, the process for the display mode (process for the instruction function) after step S603 is performed. On the other hand, when the number of bets is 2 in a state other than the first BB state and the second BB state, a negative determination is made in step S602, and the lottery result correspondence process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the present embodiment, if the internal state is played in a two-bet game, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode after step S603 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make the internal state play in a 3-bet game and facilitate a normal game in which the second BB is carried over. In addition, the specific specified number of the first BB state and the second BB state is set as 2, and in the first BB state and the second BB state, a negative judgment is always made in step S602 so that the processing for the display mode is not performed. You may.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding whether or not the push order notification or the like is generated, an advantageous section in which the push order notification or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current game is an advantageous section, is set based on the transition to the advantageous section, and is cleared based on the transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is a normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S604, and then the lottery result correspondence process ends.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 33, in the advantageous section transition lottery table, the transition rate to the advantageous section (winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 33, as the trigger of the transition lottery to the advantageous section, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as a trigger for the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, the process of acquiring the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S703. As the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery, a dedicated counter of various counter areas 106e is used, the dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined cycle, and the latest updated value of the counter is acquired in step S703. Then, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S704, and it is determined in step S705 whether or not the transition lottery has been won. By the way, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so as to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a 100% probability regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the result of the game grasped in step S701 is a trigger for the transition lottery (not an out-of-order result), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transition lottery has been won, in step S706, a process of setting the advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the game has won the transition lottery to the advantageous section in this game. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous section transition lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process, if it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The AT mode winning flag is a flag set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and the AT mode flag is a flag set when shifting to the AT mode. That is, in step S605, it is determined whether or not the transition to the AT mode has already been confirmed or the transition has been completed. If neither flag is set in step S605 and the transition to the AT mode has not been confirmed yet, the AT lottery process is executed in step S606. On the other hand, if any of the flags is set in step S605, the AT addition process is executed in step S607.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S606 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the maximum number of games (number of ceiling games) that can be consumed without shifting to the AT mode in the advantageous section. A predetermined lottery value is input to the ceiling counter at the time of transition to the advantageous section. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the ceiling counter is set to 999. That is, by digesting a maximum of 999 games after shifting to the advantageous section, the transition to the AT mode will occur even if the AT mode transition lottery is not won. In step S801, the process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counter is executed. Then, in step S802, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter has become 0. If it is not 0, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S803 to S805.

That is, in step S803, it is determined whether or not any of the first CZ mode flag, the second CZ mode flag, and the third CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode are provided as a state before winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, which is an advantageous section, and the CZ mode wins the lottery for shifting to the AT mode rather than the normal mode. It is set as an easy mode. As the CZ mode, a first CZ mode, a second CZ mode, and a third CZ mode having different transition triggers are set, and in the above-mentioned first CZ mode flag to the third CZ mode flag, the CPU 102 sets the first CZ mode to the third CZ mode. It is a flag to distinguish. If it is determined in step S803 that any CZ mode flag is not set, the normal AT mode lottery process is executed in step S804, and any CZ mode flag is set in step S803. If so, the CZ AT mode lottery process is executed in step S805.

In the normal AT mode lottery process of step S804, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S901. Then, in step S902, the normal AT mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 33, in the normal AT mode transition lottery table, the transition rate to the AT mode (the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 33, as the trigger of the normal AT mode transition lottery, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as a trigger for the normal AT mode transition lottery.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S902, the process of acquiring the random number for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S903. Then, in step S904, the AT mode transition lottery is executed, and then the AT mode lottery process ends. That is, in the normal AT mode lottery process, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the lottery result of each game.

On the other hand, in the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery is performed by using the lottery results of a plurality of games in the CZ mode.

That is, in the CZ AT mode lottery process of step S805, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 31, first, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S1001. Then, in step S1002, a process of acquiring a point table from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 33, the point table is set so that the point value acquired in this game can be different depending on the lottery result of each game. For example, the lottery result of this game is Cherry A. In some cases, 20 points will be obtained, and if the lottery result of this game is Cherry B, which is harder to win than Cherry A, 50 points will be obtained. The lower the result, the more points you will get.

Then, in step S1003, a process of adding the point value acquired in this game to the cumulative counter RC provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. In this embodiment, the lottery result command of each game is set to include the information of the cumulative counter RC, and the value of the cumulative counter RC is grasped by the display control device 81 together with the lottery result of each game. It is possible.

In the following step S1004, a process of grasping the CZ counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time one game is consumed in the CZ mode. Then, in step S1005, the process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ from various table storage areas 105a is executed, and in step S1006, the AT mode transition lottery is executed, and then the AT mode transition lottery process for CZ is performed. finish.

As shown in FIG. 34, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so that the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the CZ counter and the cumulative counter RC. More specifically, the product of a predetermined number set according to the value of the CZ counter and the value of the cumulative counter RC and the cumulative counter RC is set as the winning probability (%) of the AT mode transition lottery, for example. When the CZ counter is 16 or more, the predetermined number is set as 0.1 if the cumulative counter RC is 0 to 59, and the predetermined number is set as 0.6 if the cumulative counter RC is 80 to 100. To. In this case, if the CZ counter is 16 or more and the cumulative counter RC is 30, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is 3% due to the product of the predetermined number (0.1) and the cumulative counter RC (30). Become. If the CZ counter is 16 or more and the cumulative counter RC is 90, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is 54% due to the product of the predetermined number (0.6) and the cumulative counter RC (90). .. When the CZ counter is 3 to 1, the predetermined number is set as 0.5 if the cumulative counter RC is 0 to 9, and the predetermined number is 1.0 if the cumulative counter RC is 50 to 100. Is set as. In this case, if the CZ counter is 3 to 1 and the cumulative counter RC is 5, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is 3% due to the product of the predetermined number (0.6) and the cumulative counter RC (5). Will be. If the CZ counter is 3 to 1 and the cumulative counter RC is 90, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is 90% due to the product of the predetermined number (1.0) and the cumulative counter RC (90). Become.

That is, in the CZ mode in the present embodiment, the larger the point value acquired in each game in the CZ mode, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery, and the smaller the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the more the AT mode transition lottery. It is set to make it easier to win. Even if the point value acquired in each game in the CZ mode is large, it is set so that it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is large. In this way, it is suppressed that the AT mode transition lottery is won early after the transition to the CZ mode, and the game (directing) in the CZ mode while increasing the attention to the lottery result of each game in the CZ mode. ) Has been devised to entertain to the end.

Returning to the description of the AT lottery process, after executing the AT mode lottery process in step S804 or step S805, in step S806, the AT mode transition lottery in the AT mode lottery process of steps S804 and S805 was won. Judge whether or not. If it is won, the process for winning the AT mode in steps S807 to S810 is executed, and if it is not won, the process for not winning the AT mode in steps S811 to S819 is executed.

That is, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, first, the precursor mode setting process is executed in step S807. Even when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in step S802, the process proceeds to step S807 to perform the setting process of the precursor mode. The precursor mode is a situation in which a transition to the AT mode may occur due to winning an AT mode transition lottery or the like, and the transition to the AT mode may occur on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. This is a mode that produces a precursory effect that suggests that. In step S807, a process of setting the number of games in the precursory mode and the like is performed according to the opportunity when the transition to the AT mode may occur.

That is, in the precursor mode setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S1101, the process of grasping the cumulative counter RC is executed, and in the subsequent step S1102, the process of grasping the CZ counter is performed. To execute. Then, in step S1103, a process of acquiring an immediate notification lottery table from various table storage areas 105a is executed, and in step S1104, an immediate notification lottery process is executed. In the immediate notification lottery process, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the notification that the transition to the AT mode may occur is executed without going through the above-mentioned precursor effect.

As shown in FIG. 35, the immediate notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the immediate notification lottery differs depending on the CZ counter and the cumulative counter RC. More specifically, the smaller the value of the CZ counter, that is, the smaller the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the easier it is to win the immediate notification lottery, and the larger the value of the cumulative counter RC, that is, the point value acquired during the CZ mode. The larger the value, the easier it is to win the immediate notification lottery. When the CZ counter is 0 and the AT mode transition is won in the normal mode, the present embodiment is configured to win the immediate notification lottery with a 100% probability.

In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the immediate notification lottery in step S1104 has been won. If the immediate notification lottery has not been won, the precursor mode processing is performed in steps S1106 to S1113, and if the immediate notification lottery has been won, the AT mode notification processing is performed in steps S1114 to S1119. conduct.

If the immediate notification lottery has not been won, in step S1106, it is determined whether or not the situation in which the AT mode transition lottery was won this time was the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode of the CZ modes. In the case of the second CZ mode instead of the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode, the lottery process for the number of precursory effect games is executed in step S1107. Then, in step S1108, a process of inputting a value obtained by adding the lottery result of step S1107 and the current CZ counter (the number of remaining games in the CZ mode) to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. do. The precursor counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games from the situation where the transition to the AT mode may occur to the notification of the situation (AT winning notification effect).

In the lottery process for the number of precursory effect games in step S1107, the precursory effect game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of precursory effect games this time is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the precursor effect game number table is set so that any one of 13 games to 15 games is selected. For example, 15 games are easily selected, while 13 games and 14 games are easily selected. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games, such as being difficult to select. For example, if 14 games are selected in the precursory effect game number lottery process and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is 3 games, 17 is input to the precursory counter, and the transition to the AT mode may occur. (After the AT mode winning flag is set), a notification to that effect will be given after 17 games.

After executing the input process of the precursor counter in step S1108, the process of setting the precursor flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1109. Then, in step S1110, the process of setting the precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of setting the precursor mode is terminated. The precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the precursor mode has been set, and the precursor command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the precursor mode has been set. be. Further, the precursor command includes the value of the precursor counter, and the display control device 81 grasps the game to be notified from the value of the precursor counter that the situation where the transition to the AT mode may occur is possible. It becomes possible. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the precursor command is received will be described in detail later.

In the case of the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode in step S1106, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not it is the first CZ mode, and in the case of the first CZ mode, it is predetermined in the CZ counter in step S1112. The process of inputting the value obtained by adding the predetermined number (5) to the precursor counter is executed. Further, when it is determined in step S1111 that the mode is not the first CZ mode but the third CZ mode, the process of inputting the value of the CZ counter to the precursor counter is executed in step S1113. Then, after executing the precursor flag set process in step S1109 and the precursor command set process in step S1110, the precursor mode setting process is terminated. In this case, in the first CZ mode, a predetermined number of games are executed after the number of remaining games in the first CZ mode becomes 0, and in the third CZ mode, the number of remaining games in the third CZ mode is executed. When becomes 0, the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is performed.

That is, the number of games until the notification that the AT mode transition lottery is won differs depending on the type of CZ mode when the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the first CZ mode is smaller than the second CZ mode and the third CZ mode. The number of games will be used to notify that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. The reason for such a configuration will be described in detail when explaining the content of the effect in the CZ mode.

If it is determined in step S1105 that the immediate notification lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1114. In step S1114, a process of clearing the CZ counter to 0 is executed. After that, in step S1105, an AT type determination process is performed to determine whether the AT mode type this time is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. In the present embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode, in which the additional performance (the winning probability of the additional lottery) in the AT mode is different, are set as the AT mode, and the second AT mode has the additional performance more than the first AT mode. Is excellent (it is set so that it is easy to win the additional lottery). In the AT type determination process of step S1115, for example, the current AT mode type is randomly selected according to the set value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased in the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section, and the like. Determined by.

In step S1116, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode is determined based on the processing result of step S1115. In the first AT mode, the process of setting the first AT notification flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1117, and the first AT winning immediate notification command is output to the display control device 81 in step S1118. After executing the setting process, the setting process of this precursor mode ends. The 1st AT notification flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the 1st AT start roll appears on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the start of the 1st AT mode, and is a 1st AT winning immediate notification command. Is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the situation where the transition to the first AT mode may occur has occurred. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the first AT winning immediate notification command will be described in detail later.

When it is determined in step S1116 that it is the second AT instead of the first AT, a process of setting the second AT notification flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1119, and the second AT winning immediate notification command is executed in step S1120. Is executed as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the setting process of the precursor mode is terminated. The second AT notification flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that a second AT start roll appears on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the start of the second AT mode, and is a second AT winning immediate notification command. Is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the situation where the transition to the second AT mode may occur has occurred. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the second AT winning immediate notification command will also be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the AT lottery process, after executing the precursor mode setting process in step S807, it is determined in step S808 whether or not any CZ mode flag is set. If any of the CZ mode flags is set, the process of clearing the set CZ mode flag is executed in step S809. If a negative determination is made in step S808, or after the process of step S809 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S810, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. By performing such processing, in the lottery result correspondence processing after the next game, affirmative determination is made in step S605.

When it is determined in step S806 that the AT mode transition lottery is not won, it is determined in step S811 whether or not any of the CZ mode flags is set. If none of the CZ mode flags are set and the mode is normal, a lottery for shifting to the CZ mode is performed in steps S821 to S819. On the other hand, when any of the CZ mode flags is set, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is without performing the processes of steps S812 to S819.

That is, in step S812, the advantageous section game number AG provided in the various counter areas 106e is equal to or greater than the predetermined first predetermined value (31) and equal to or less than the predetermined second predetermined value (700). Judge whether or not. The advantageous section game number AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the advantageous section, and is added by 1 for each game after shifting to the advantageous section, and is reset when the advantageous section ends. When the number of advantageous section games AG is less than the first predetermined number or larger than the second predetermined number, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is without performing the transition lottery to the CZ mode.

In the present embodiment, the CZ mode may be set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and the first predetermined number is until the notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode set at the transition to the advantageous section is completed. It is set as a number larger than the number of games required for. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the ceiling counter set at the time of transition to the advantageous section becomes 0, so that the transition to the AT mode is permitted without going through the AT mode transition lottery. The second predetermined value is a value close to the upper limit value (999) of the ceiling counter set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and more specifically, it is set as 700 as a value of 70% of the upper limit value.

That is, when the advantageous section is exhausted to a value close to the upper limit value of the ceiling counter, the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode is not performed. The ceiling counter setting process will be described in detail later, but a value smaller than the second predetermined value may be set in the ceiling counter at the time of transition to an advantageous section. In this case, a CZ mode transition lottery or the like is performed. Before reaching the maximum number of games (700), the ceiling is reached and the transition to AT mode is allowed. In other words, even if a value smaller than the second predetermined value is input to the ceiling counter, the CZ mode transition lottery may be won immediately before reaching the ceiling.

When the number of advantageous section games AG is within the range in which the CZ mode transition lottery is performed in step S812, the process of acquiring the CZ mode transition lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed in step S813, and the process is performed in step S814. Then, the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. As shown in FIG. 33, in the CZ mode transition lottery table, the transition rate to the CZ mode (the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. For example, if the lottery result of this game is chance A, there is a 7% chance of winning the CZ mode transition lottery, and if the lottery result of this game is chance B, which is harder to win than chance A. , The probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery is higher than in the case of chance A, and the lower the appearance rate as a result of the game lottery, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. Has been done.

After executing the CZ mode transition lottery in step S814, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. If it is not won, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is. If the CZ mode transition lottery has been won, the second CZ mode game number lottery process is executed in step S816, and the number of games corresponding to the lottery result is input to the CZ counter in step S817. The process of setting the second CZ mode flag is executed in S818. That is, when the CZ mode transition lottery in the normal mode is won in the advantageous section, the second CZ mode is set, and the number of games is determined by the lottery process in step S816. In the lottery process for the number of second CZ mode games, the second CZ mode game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of games in the second CZ mode this time is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the second CZ mode game number table is set so that any one of 8 games to 15 games is selected. For example, 10 games and 11 games are easily selected, while 8 games are selected. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games, such as games and 15 games are difficult to select. For example, when 10 games are selected in the second CZ mode game number lottery process, 10 is input to the CZ counter in step S817.

After setting the second CZ mode flag in step S818, the process of setting the second CZ mode start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S819, and then the AT lottery process ends. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the second CZ mode start command will be described in detail later.

<Process for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. As described above, the AT addition process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition process, first, in step S1201, the lottery result of this game is grasped. Then, in steps S1202 to S1208, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table according to the current situation is executed. That is, in step S1202, the AT mode winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred after the transition to the AT mode can occur. If the situation is before the transition to the AT mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, and it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The situation in which the first AT notification flag and the second AT notification flag are set is after the notification that the transition to the AT mode is possible has already occurred (AT winning notification effect). Moreover, it means that the transition to the AT mode has not occurred. In other words, the situation in which neither the first AT notification flag nor the second AT notification flag is set in step S1203 is a situation in which a transition to the AT mode may occur, but a notification to that effect is still available. It means that the situation is not done (precursor mode).

Therefore, if it is determined in step S1203 that neither the first AT notification flag nor the second AT notification flag is set, in step S1204, a lottery table is added from the various table storage areas 105a before the winning notification. When the process of acquiring is executed and it is determined in step S1203 that any of the flags is set, the process of acquiring the additional lottery table after the winning notification and before the transition is executed in step S12056.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the additional lottery table before the winning notification and the additional lottery table before the transition after the winning notification are compared, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table before the transition after the winning notification is won. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery than the additional lottery using the additional lottery table before notification. More specifically, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by the chance eye B, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table before the winning notification is won with a probability of 5%, whereas the additional lottery after the winning notification is added before the transition. In the additional lottery using the table, there is a 7% probability of winning, and in the situation before the transition to the AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery after the winning notification than before the AT mode winning notification.

The case where the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1202 means that the AT mode flag is set, and it means that the transition to the AT mode has already occurred. In this case, the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S1206, and it is determined whether or not the current AT mode is the first AT mode. In the first AT mode, the process of acquiring the additional lottery table for the first AT from the various table storage areas 105a is executed in step S1207, and in the second AT mode, the various table storage areas 105a are executed in step S1208. The process of acquiring the additional lottery table for the second AT is executed.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the 1st AT additional lottery table and the 2nd AT additional lottery table are compared, the additional lottery using the 2nd AT additional lottery table uses the 1st AT additional lottery table. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery than the additional lottery. More specifically, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by Cherry B, in the additional lottery using the 1st AT additional lottery table, there is a 10% probability of winning, whereas the additional lottery using the 2nd AT additional lottery table is used. In the lottery, there is a 20% probability of winning, and in the situation after the transition to the AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

After the additional lottery table is acquired by any of the processes of step S1204, step S1205, step S1207, and step S1208, the additional lottery is executed in step S1209. Then, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery is not won, the AT addition process is terminated as it is. If the additional lottery is won, the additional game number lottery process is executed in step S1211. In the additional game number lottery process, the additional game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of additional games this time is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 38, the number of additional games table is set so that the number of additional games differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the addition. For example, the addition is performed with the normal lip A as an opportunity. In that case, an average of 150 games will be added, while if the cherry A is used as an opportunity, an average of 15 games will be added. The case is set so that the number of additional games is larger.

After executing the additional game number lottery process in step S1211, the process of adding the number of additional games this time to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1212. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the AT mode. After executing the process of step S1212, the process of setting the addition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1213, and then the AT addition process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the addition command executes a process for performing the addition notification effect corresponding to the addition on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64.

The explanation returns to the explanation of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 27).

After executing the process of step S606 or step S607, in step S608, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a push order winning combination. The push order combination is a result including a normal lip A, a normal lip B, and a normal lip C in addition to the push order bell. Normal rip A, normal rip B, and normal rip C are all results of winning multiple replays, so that the replays that establish a prize may differ depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39, in the normal lip A, the reels 32L, 32M, so that the first replay winning is basically established regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. The stop control of 32R is performed. On the other hand, in the normal lip B and the normal lip C, when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, respectively, so that the second re-game prize and the third re-game prize are established. When the stop control of 32R is performed and the left stop switch 42 or the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the first replay winning prize is established. .. However, in these normal rip A, normal rip B, and normal rip C, even if any of the re-game winnings of the duplicate winning re-game is established, the privilege to be given is the re-game, and the re-game is established. Only the type of game is different. In other words, the normal rip A, the normal rip B, and the normal rip C are game results in which the re-game winning is established regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the stop result differs depending on the operation order. Then, in particular, the normal rip B and the normal rip C are the triggers for starting the AT mode, and after the AT mode winning flag is set, the notification that the transition to the AT mode may occur is executed. After that, after the first AT mode is started in the game in which the second re-game winning can be established, the AT mode winning flag is set, and then the notification that the transition to the AT mode can occur is executed. , The second AT mode is started in the game in which the third re-game prize can be established. That is, even if the AT mode winning flag is set, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are not started until the above notification (AT winning notification effect) is executed, and after the above notification is executed. However, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are not started until the game is such that the second re-game prize and the third re-game prize can be established.

When it is determined in step S608 that the push order winning combination is won, it is determined in step S609 whether or not any of the CZ mode flag, the AT mode winning flag, or the AT mode flag is set. If any of these flags is set, the push order notification process is executed in step S610, and then the lottery result correspondence process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S608 or step S609, the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the push order notification process executed in step S610, an outline of the push order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the push order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described. The push order notification and the push order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, push order navigation, order notification, and mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the push order notification is performed by the main control device 101. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the push order notification effect.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. 40 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 40 (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to turn on the light. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Since each of the individual light sources irradiates light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

For each display segment N1 to N8 in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments, and the first display segments N1 to 7 display segments N7. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally to the lower right portion of the region provided with the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

If it is possible to individually display the symbols of a plurality of patterns on the instruction monitor 68, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and further, 7 instead of 8 segments. A configuration using 9 segments, 9 segments, or the like may be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Further, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the light source on and off, and if the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8. A segment display may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbol may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for notifying the operation order of the push order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the winning mode is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of "left"-> "middle"-> "right" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "1" is displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is advantageous for the player, the first display segment N1. The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 shifts to an advantageous section, and when a predetermined start condition including a notification condition that causes a push order notification to occur is satisfied, the eighth display segment N8 is lit in a game in which the start condition is satisfied. .. Further, it is turned off when the AT mode ends and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section.

That is, the section in which the operation order of the push order bell or the like is easily notified so that the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is set. In the advantageous section, it lights up during a specific section where the benefits of push order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section or a non-specific section that is not a specific section even if it is an advantageous section. It serves as a section display (specific notification means).

As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, the front portion of the gaming machine below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to see. Further, it can be said that the oversight by the player is suppressed from the fact that the player who advances the game aiming at the acquisition of the medal is arranged near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy to watch.

Further, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is defined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display unit). Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display unit are controlled to emit light (when the lighting state is set), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display section (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine 2). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined (so that the illuminance is doubled). Also from such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on is suppressed.

Next, the push order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the push order combination in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left is won.

As shown in FIG. 41 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and it is displayed larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a numerical value is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification, the push order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. Is set to run. By configuring the push order notification at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective in this way, the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make the operation desired, and the game can be advanced at a good tempo.

<Process for notification of push order>
Next, the push order notification process executed in step S610 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not any of the first CZ mode flag to the third CZ mode flag is set. When none of the first CZ mode flag to the third CZ mode flag is set, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. The case where the first CZ mode flag to the third CZ mode flag are not set and the AT mode winning flag is set is a case where the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred after the AT mode is won. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the AT mode winning flag is set but these AT notification flags are not set, it means that the AT mode transition lottery has been won but the precursor mode is still in progress. In this case, the push order notification is not generated in this game, and the push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is normal rip B or normal rip C. If the normal rip A or the push order bell is used instead of the normal rip B and the normal rip C, the final push order notification process is terminated as it is. In the case of either normal rip B or normal rip C, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not it is normal rip B. In the case of the normal rip B, in step S1306, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned first AT notification flag is set. If the second AT notification flag is set instead of the first AT notification flag, the final push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the normal rip B is won and the first AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1307 and the process for starting the first AT mode is executed.

That is, in step S1307, the first AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1308, the first AT start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The first AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the first AT mode is started from this game. After that, in step S1309, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the second re-game winning is performed. Then, in step S1310, a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then a process for notifying the final push order is executed. To finish. In the display control device 81 that has received this push order command, as the push order notification effect corresponding to the second replay winning, the push order notification effect in the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first and "Aim from the right! The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the display such as "!", Voice navigation, and the like are performed, and the symbol corresponding to the second replay winning prize is notified.

If it is determined in step S1305 that the normal lip C is not the normal lip B, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether or not the second AT notification flag is set. If the first AT notification flag is set instead of the second AT notification flag, the final push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the normal rip C is won and the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1312 to execute the process for starting the second AT mode.

That is, in step S1312, the second AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1313, the second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The second AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the second AT mode is started from this game. After that, in step S1314, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the third re-game winning is performed. Then, in step S1315, a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then a process for notifying the final push order is executed. To finish. In the display control device 81 that has received this push order command, as the push order notification effect corresponding to the third replay winning prize, the push order notification effect in the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first and "Aim from the right! The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the display such as "!", Voice navigation, and the like are performed, and the symbol corresponding to the third replay winning prize is notified.

If it is determined in step S1301 that any CZ mode flag is set, or if the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1301 and the AT mode is already in progress, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a push order bell. If it is not a push order bell, the push order notification process ends as it is. In the case of the push order bell, it is determined in step S1317 whether or not any of the CZ mode flags is set. When any of the CZ mode flags is set, it is determined in step S1318 whether or not the notified flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The notified flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the push order notification at the time of winning the push order bell has already been performed in the CZ mode, and is a flag at the end of the CZ mode (including the transition to the AT mode). ) Is a flag cleared. If the notified flag is set, the push order notification process ends as it is. If the notified flag is not set, the process of setting the notified flag is executed in step S1319.

When the AT mode flag is set instead of the CZ mode flag in step S1317, or after the processing of step S1319 is executed, in step S1320, the first small winning combination is won according to the type of the push order bell this time. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the sixth small winning combination is performed. Then, in step S1321, a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process is executed. The process for notifying the final push order is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received this push order command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning is performed.

<Processing for winning results>
Next, the winning result handling process performed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. In the winning result handling process, processing for starting and ending the CZ mode, the AT mode, and the like is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1401, a process of grasping the current gaming state is performed, and in step S1402, whether or not the number of bets of this game is a specific specified number defined in the state grasped in step S1401. Judgment is made. Such a process corresponds to the above steps S601 and S602, and if the number is not a specific specified number in step S1402, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is without performing the processes after step S1403. If the number of bets is a specific specified number corresponding to the state, the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, the first game number management process is executed, and in step S1404, the second game number management process is executed. The first game number management process is a process for managing the number of games before the transition to the AT mode, such as the CZ mode and the precursor mode, and the second game number management process is a process for managing the number of games in the AT mode. be.

In the first game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and in either BB state. If there is, the first game number management process is terminated as it is. That is, if the transition to the second BB state is caused in the 2-bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the CZ mode is not managed. If it is not in any of the BB states, the process proceeds to step S1502, and it is determined whether or not the CZ counter is larger than 0 and the number of games set at the time of transition to the CZ mode has not been exhausted. As described above, when the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode is won, the CZ mode flag is cleared in the AT lottery processing. Therefore, even in a situation where the CZ mode flag is not set, it may be determined in step S1502 that the CZ counter is larger than 0.

Incidentally, as described above, when the AT mode transition is won during the CZ mode, if the immediate notification lottery is not won, a value equal to or higher than the CZ counter is input to the precursor counter. That is, when the CZ counter is larger than 0 and the CZ mode flag is not set, it means that it is a precursor mode after winning the AT mode transition.

If the CZ counter is larger than 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the CZ counter is executed in step S1503. Then, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not the CZ counter becomes 0, and if it becomes 0, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not any CZ mode flag is set. As described above, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode flag is cleared. Therefore, when any CZ mode flag is set in step S1505, it means that the CZ mode flag is set. This means that the CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery. If any of the CZ mode flags is set in step S1505, the process of setting the CZ end game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1506. The CZ end game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp the game in which the CZ mode has ended, and is cleared after the end of the finished game (see step S203).

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S1505, or after the process of step S1506 is executed, the process of setting the CZ end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1507. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the CZ end command will be described in detail later.

When the CZ counter is 0 in step S1502, when the CZ counter is not 0 in step S1504, or after the processing of step S1507 is executed, the precursor counter is larger than 0 in step S1508, and the precursor mode is set. It is determined whether or not the number of games corresponding to the precursor counter set in the setting process has not been exhausted yet. When the precursor counter is larger than 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the precursor counter is executed in step S1509. Then, in step S1510, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has become 0.

When the precursor counter becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S1511 to clear the precursor flag. Then, in step S1512, an AT type determination process is performed to determine whether the AT mode type this time is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. Such a process is a process corresponding to the process of step S1115. That is, in the AT type determination process of step S1512, for example, according to the set value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased in the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section, etc., or randomly, the current AT mode type Will be decided by lottery. The AT type determination process in step S1115 and the AT type determination process in step S1512 may have different selectivity between the first AT mode and the second AT mode. For example, step S1512 is higher than the process in step S1115. The processing of may have a configuration in which the selection rate of the second AT mode is higher.

In step S1513, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode is determined as the processing result of step S1512. When the mode is determined as the first AT mode, the process of setting the first AT notification flag is executed in step S1514, and the process of setting the first AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1515. After that, the game number management process is terminated. By setting the first AT notification flag, the process for generating the push order notification for the second re-game winning is performed in the above-mentioned push order notification process. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the first AT winning notification command will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S1513 that the AT mode to be transferred this time is not the first AT mode but the second AT mode, the process of setting the notification flag for the second AT is executed in step S1516, and the second AT is executed in step S1517. After executing the process of setting the winning notification command as the output target to the display control device 81, the game number management process is terminated. By setting the second AT notification flag, the process for generating the push order notification for the third re-game winning is performed in the above-mentioned push order notification process. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the second AT winning notification command will be described in detail later.

In the second game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and in either BB state. If there is, the second game number management process is terminated as it is. That is, if the transition to the second BB state is caused in the 2-bet game, the number of games in the AT mode is not managed. If it is not in any BB state, the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether or not the AT counter is larger than 0 and the number of remaining games in the AT mode is larger than 0.

If the AT counter is larger than 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the AT counter is executed in step S1603. Then, it is determined in step S1604 whether or not the AT counter has become 0, and if it becomes 0, a process of clearing the AT mode flag is executed in step S1605. Then, in step S1606, a process of setting the AT end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the AT end command will be described in detail later. If the AT counter is 0 in step S1602, or if the AT counter is not 0 in step S1604, the second game number management process is terminated as it is.

After executing the process of step S1606, the third CZ mode game number lottery process is executed in step S1607, the number of games corresponding to the lottery result is input to the CZ counter in step S1608, and the third CZ mode game number lottery process is performed in step S1609. 3 Execute the process of setting the CZ mode flag. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode ends, the game shifts to the CZ mode, and the CZ mode that shifts when the AT mode ends is set to the third CZ mode, and the number of games is set to step S1607. It is determined by the lottery process. In the lottery process for the number of third CZ mode games, the third CZ mode game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of games in the third CZ mode this time is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the third CZ mode game number table is set so that any one of 25 games to 30 games is selected. For example, 30 games are easily selected, while 25 games are selected. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games, such as being difficult to play. For example, when 30 games are selected in the third CZ mode game number lottery process, 30 is input to the CZ counter in step S1608.

After setting the third CZ mode flag in step S1609, the process of setting the third CZ mode start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1610. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the third CZ mode start command will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the winning result correspondence process, after executing the game number management process of step S1403 and step S1404, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the first AT start flag is set. As described above, the 1st AT start flag is a flag set in the game in which the 2nd re-game winning is possible when the transition to the 1st AT mode occurs, and more specifically, the 1st AT notification flag is used. It is a flag that is set at the start of the game that normally wins Lip B in the set situation. That is, the first AT start flag is not set based on the winning result. When the first AT start flag is set, the process of clearing the first AT start flag is cleared in step S1406, and the process of setting the first AT flag in various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1407. As described above, by setting the first AT flag, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the first AT is performed.

When it is determined in step S1405 that the first AT start flag is not set, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the second AT start flag is set. As described above, the second AT start flag is a flag set in the game in which the third re-game winning is possible when the transition to the second AT mode occurs, and more specifically, the second AT notification flag is used. This is a flag that is set at the start of a game that normally wins Lip C in the set situation. That is, the second AT start flag is not set based on the winning result. When the second AT start flag is set, the second AT start flag is cleared in step S1409, and the process of setting the second AT flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1410. If it is determined in step S1408 that the second AT start flag is not set, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is. As described above, by setting the second AT flag, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the second AT is performed.

After executing the process of step S1407 or step S1410, the process of inputting 50 to the above AT counter is executed in step S1411. As described above, the AT counter is a counter corresponding to the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and in the present embodiment, 50 games are set as the initial number of games in either the first AT mode or the second AT mode. The number of initial games may be different between the first AT mode and the second AT mode, or the number of initial games may be determined by lottery. In this case, the number of initial games may be larger in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

In step S1412, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed, and in step S1413, a process of setting the AT mode flag is executed. Then, in step S1414, a process of setting the AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of dealing with the winning result is terminated. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the AT start command will be described in detail later.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, the section display first process and the section display second process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator, shifting to the advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. 46. The section display first process is a process performed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41 and based on the lottery result. It is carried out after the display mode transition lottery or the like (lottery result correspondence processing) is performed.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, and more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates a case where at least a specific section in which the notification condition in which the push order notification can occur is satisfied, among the advantageous sections. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. If the advantageous section flag is not set, in step S1703, a process of adding 1 to the normal counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The normal counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games started as a normal section instead of an advantageous section.

After executing the process of step S1703, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag set when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the advantageous section transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. When the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1705. Then, in step S1706, the process of setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1707, processing is performed to start counting the number of games in the advantageous section, and more specifically, measuring the number of games AG in the advantageous section of various counter areas 106e. As described above, the advantageous section game number AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of executed games in the advantageous section. Then, in step S1708, the processing for the advantageous section transition game is executed.

In the advantageous section transition game process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, the first CZ mode game number lottery process is executed in step S1801, and the number of games corresponding to the lottery result is input to the CZ counter in step S1802. Then, in step S1803, the process of setting the first CZ mode flag is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the CZ mode is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and when the transition to the advantageous section is triggered, the first CZ mode is set, and the number of games is the lottery process of step S1801. Determined by. In the lottery process for the number of first CZ mode games, the first CZ mode game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of games in the first CZ mode this time is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the first CZ mode game number table is set so that any one of 8 games to 10 games is selected, and 8 games and 9 games are easy to select, while 10 games are easy to select. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games, such as being difficult to select. For example, when 10 games are selected in the first CZ mode game number lottery process, 10 is input to the CZ counter in step S1802.

After setting the first CZ mode flag in step S1803, the process of setting the first CZ mode start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1804. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the first CZ mode start command will be described in detail later.

In the following step S1805, the ceiling game number lottery process is executed. In the ceiling game number lottery process, a ceiling game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of ceiling games this time is randomly determined. In the ceiling game number table, the number of games that are easy to select (for example, 341 and 682) and the number of games that are difficult to select or are not selected are set within a range that does not exceed the maximum number of ceiling games (999 games in this embodiment). .. Further, in the ceiling game number table, the minimum number of games is set to 100 games, and during the first CZ mode set at the time of transition to the advantageous section (more specifically, during the precursor mode when the AT mode transition is won during the first CZ mode). It is set not to reach the ceiling game.

In step S1806, a process of inputting the number of ceiling games to the ceiling counter is executed based on the process result of step S1805. After that, the processing for the advantageous section transition game is terminated.

Returning to the description of the section display first process, after executing the process for the advantageous section transition game in step S1708, or when it is determined in step S1702 that the advantageous section flag is set, any one of them is performed in step S1709. It is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag or the AT mode flag is set. As described above, in the present embodiment, the push order notification at the time of winning the push order bell can be performed in the AT mode or the CZ mode, and the situation in which any of these flags is set is defined as the situation. It can be said that the display start condition of the section display is satisfied. When any of the flags is set, the display of the section indicator is started by turning on the eighth display segment N8 in step S1710.

When it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, the process of continuing the display in the advantageous section is executed in step S1711. Specifically, in step S1711, a process for continuing the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state is performed. That is, the process for ending the display of the section display is not performed in the first section display process.

Even when it is determined in step S1704 that neither the advantageous section flag nor the advantageous section winning game flag is set, or when the advantageous section flag or the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the CZ mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is not set and the normal mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

Further, after executing the display start processing of the section display in step S1710 and after executing the display continuation processing in step S1711, the process proceeds to step S1713. In step S1713, a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification can be generated, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1712 or step S1713, the combination ratio calculation process is executed in step S1714. In such a process, the value of the combination ratio second counter is divided by the addition value (total number of games) of the combination ratio first counter and the combination ratio second counter. That is, the combination ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur to the total number of games. Then, in step S1715, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1714 on the combination monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the combination monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display units including seven display segments. Specifically, the combination monitor 77 has a first display unit 77a, a second display unit 77b, a third display unit 77c, a fourth display unit 77d, and a fifth display unit 77e as a 7-segment display unit. There is. The display segments in the first display unit 77a to the fifth display unit 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, like the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and the individual light sources are on / off controlled. By doing so, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light any combination of display segments. As a result, the combination monitor 77 can display predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) individually, and in particular, the combination monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. There is.

In step S1715, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1714 is output to the combination monitor 77, and the display units 77a to 77e on the combination monitor 77 display a four-digit number on the combination monitor 77. Display control is performed. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur out of the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 and up to 4 digits after the decimal point, for example, "0.5012". The numerical value is displayed on the combination monitor 77. After executing the process of step S1715, the section display first process is terminated.

In addition, in the arithmetic processing of step S1714, the display control of the combination ratio monitor 77 may be performed after performing the processing of rounding off the number of the fifth digit after the decimal point. Further, among the role ratio monitors 77, the first display unit 77a basically displays "0", so that the first display unit 77a is not provided, the first display unit 77a is printed, and the like. It may be configured so that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that the decimal point is displayed between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48. As described above, the second section display process is a process performed in step S416 of the reel control process, and at the end of one game, the medal is paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result. Etc. (Processing for winning results) will be performed.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the second section display process is terminated as it is. If the advantageous section flag is set, the process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed in step S1902. Specifically, the process of adding 1 to the number of games AG in the advantageous section is performed. After executing the process of step S1902, in step S1903, the update process of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S1903, the number of inserted sheets (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts on condition that the game result of this game is not one of the re-game winnings, and the subtraction result is the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY. By adding to, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is updated.

After executing the MY update process in step S1903, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1904, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1905. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) in the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, the number of advantageous section games AG (the number of digested games in the advantageous section), the AT counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode), the CZ counter (the number of remaining games in the CZ mode), and the precursor counter (precursor). Whether or not the total number of games remaining in the mode) is greater than the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is grasped. Then, in such a situation, the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 cards) in the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. Is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the total of the expected increase number calculated from the AT counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is calculated from the increase / decrease number in the advantageous section. Understand whether there are many situations. Then, in such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the following step S1906, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit number of games 1500, or whether or not the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has reached the upper limit increase number of 2400 or more. When any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, in step S1907, the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S1908, a process of ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S1909, a process of initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is performed, and in step S1910, a process of clearing the normal counter is performed, and then the second process of displaying this section is performed. To finish.

Regarding the initialization process of the advantageous section information in step S1909, more specifically, the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the advantageous section this time, and the flags and counters set during the advantageous section this time. Is a process to return to the initial value. For example, if the advantageous section flag, the AT mode winning flag, the AT mode flag, the various CZ mode flags, and the like are not cleared and are set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of advantageous section games AG, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY, the precursor counter for the precursor mode, the counter for the number of continuous games such as the CZ mode, etc. are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all variables or parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and the RAM is cleared for such variables or parameters. It is a process to perform.

If it is determined in step S1906 that the advantageous section game number AG has not reached the upper limit value and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S1911 and the CZ end game flag is set. Determine if it is.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in various CZ modes, the CZ mode flag is cleared when the AT mode winning flag is set (steps S808 to S810). The CZ end game flag is a flag set when the number of remaining games (CZ counter) in the CZ mode becomes 0 while the CZ mode flag is set. Therefore, when the CZ end game flag is set, it means that the CZ mode has ended without winning the AT mode transition lottery.

When the CZ mode end game flag is set in step S1911, it is determined in step S1912 whether or not the second CZ mode flag or the third CZ mode flag is set.

The second CZ mode flag or the third CZ mode flag is set in step S1912, and is set as a trigger for the second CZ mode set when the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the advantageous section or when the AT mode ends. If the third CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step S1907 and the process for ending the advantageous section is executed. On the other hand, in step S1912, the first CZ mode flag is set instead of the second CZ mode flag and the third CZ mode flag, and the first CZ mode set as a trigger for the advantageous section transition wins the AT mode transition lottery. If it ends without doing so, the process proceeds to step S1913, the first CZ mode flag is cleared, and then the second process of displaying this section is ended.

That is, when the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section ends, while the first CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery. , The advantageous section continues without ending. The second CZ mode flag and the third CZ mode flag are cleared at the time of the process for ending the advantageous section (step S1909).

<Advantageous section and display mode>
The relationship between the advantageous section and the display mode will be described with reference to FIG. 49.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, an advantageous section in which push order notification can occur and a normal section in which push order notification does not occur are set, and a situation in which the advantageous section flag is set is an advantageous section. , The situation where the advantageous section flag is not set is the normal section. The advantageous section flag is a flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. For example, the initialization process of the RAM 106 is performed when the set value of the slot machine 10 is changed (the winning probability is changed). Therefore, the advantageous section flag is also cleared. That is, when the set value is changed and the power is turned on, the game is started from the normal section. In the normal section, the display mode is set to the normal mode in which the push order notification does not occur.

If you win the advantageous section transition lottery in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section will occur. More specifically, the advantageous section winning game flag is set by winning the advantageous section transition lottery process, and the advantageous section flag is set on condition that the advantageous section winning game flag is set in the section display first process. To. Then, in the process of setting the advantageous section flag, the process for the advantageous section transition game is executed, and in the process for the advantageous section transition game, the process for setting the display mode to the first CZ mode is performed. In addition, the number of ceiling games (maximum 999 games) is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section.

In the first CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set to 8 to 10 games, and during the first CZ mode, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode can be won with high probability. If the lottery for transition to AT mode is won in the first CZ mode, the transition to AT mode occurs mainly via the precursor mode. On the other hand, if the first CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the display mode shifts to the normal mode. However, in this case, the advantageous section does not end.

When the section is advantageous and the display mode is the normal mode, the CZ mode transition lottery is executed together with the AT mode transition lottery. If the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the second CZ mode.

In the second CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set to 8 to 15 games, and like the first CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set so that the lottery for transition to the AT mode can be won with high probability. ing. If the lottery for transition to AT mode is won in the second CZ mode, the transition to AT mode occurs mainly via the precursor mode. On the other hand, when the second CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the display mode shifts to the normal mode, and further, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section.

The AT mode is a mode in which push order notification corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is generated when the push order bell is won, and a large number of medals can be expected to increase. When the push order notification is generated after shifting to the AT mode, it becomes possible to establish the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination at the time of winning each push order bell, and per game in the AT mode. The net increase is about 8.04 plus. In the AT mode, the initial number of games is set to 50, and by winning the additional lottery, the remaining number of games is added. In addition, the probability of winning the additional lottery is set higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode. When the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0, the AT mode ends and the third CZ mode is set.

In the third CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set to 25 to 30 games, and even during the third CZ mode, as in the first CZ mode and the second CZ mode, the lottery for transition to the AT mode can be won with high probability. Is set to. If the lottery for transition to AT mode is won in the third CZ mode, transition to AT mode occurs. On the other hand, when the third CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the display mode shifts to the normal mode, and further, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section.

As described above, in the CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery using the CZ AT mode transition lottery table is executed in each game, and the CZ AT mode transition lottery table is AT rather than the normal AT mode transition lottery table. It is set so that it will be easy to win the mode transition. Further, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is configured to determine the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery by using the point values acquired in each game of the CZ mode. Then, from the point that the lottery for shifting to each game AT mode is executed in the CZ mode and the point value can be obtained in each game in the CZ mode, the longer the number of games is set to the CZ mode, the more the AT mode shifts. It can be said that it is easy to win the lottery. That is, the second CZ mode is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the first CZ mode, and the third CZ mode is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the second CZ mode.

Then, although the 1st CZ mode is less likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than the 2nd CZ mode or the 3rd CZ mode, the advantageous section ends if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the 2nd CZ mode or the 3rd CZ mode. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the first CZ mode, the advantageous section does not end. Therefore, from the viewpoint of continuity of the advantageous section, the first CZ mode is the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode. It is more advantageous for the player than.

<About the display of the push order display and the section display and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG. 50.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 50, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. That is, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the instruction function, whereas the advantageous section has the performance related to the instruction function such as the push order notification.

In the normal section, for example, if the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won by winning the 7th small role (watermelon), the game shifts to the advantageous section in the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established, and the game is started. The measurement of the number of executed games in the advantageous section (counting the number of games in the advantageous section AG) is started. As described above, the first CZ mode is set at the time of the advantageous section transition, and the push order notification may occur in the first CZ mode. Therefore, the section display is displayed in the advantageous section transition game (first CZ mode transition game). Assuming that the start condition of is satisfied, the eighth display segment N8 lights up. More specifically, at the start of the advantageous section transition game (first CZ mode transition game) (when the start lever 41 is operated), the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

After that, in the situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit, the push order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is generated. In this case, the push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above, and the player pushes based on the push order information. You can grasp the order. In the push order notification, the push order information is started to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game (timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the final reel are pressed). ) Ends the display. If the game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends at the time of the third reel stop ON operation, and the eighth display is completed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the push order combination is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section. The conditions for ending the advantageous section include that the number of continuous games and the number of medals increased reach the upper limit, and in this embodiment, the second CZ mode and the third CZ mode are terminated without winning the AT mode transition lottery. It has been. When the advantageous section ends, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout ends (by the section display second process which is the process after the payout determination process). If the medal is not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation (timing when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the final reel is completed). do.

As described above, the push order notification can be generated by shifting to the advantageous section, and the transition to the advantageous section (shift to a specific section) and the end of the advantageous section are notified by the eighth display segment N8. Be clearly notified. In other words, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is lit, it is clearly understood that the situation is such that at least the benefits of the push order notification can be enjoyed (specific section, substantial increase section). It is possible. By doing so, for example, whether the medal increase is generated by enjoying the benefit of the push order notification in the advantageous section, or the benefit of the push order notification is illegally enjoyed even though it is not an advantageous section. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to clearly confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes an increase in medals is being performed.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section, if the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode of the CZ modes ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, not only the second CZ mode and the third CZ mode but also the advantageous section ends. Then, at the end of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is turned off, so that the player can clearly grasp that the advantageous section has ended. In other words, by turning off the eighth display segment N8, it becomes possible to clearly grasp that the AT mode transition lottery was not won in the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode.

Then, there is a high possibility that the game will be terminated more often based on the fact that the eighth display segment N8 is turned off. Further, the game table in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off also serves as a mark that the AT mode transition lottery was not won in the immediately preceding second CZ mode or third CZ mode. Therefore, for example, the transition of the predecessor. The act of picking up the winning lottery is also less likely to occur, and in any case, turning off the eighth display segment N8 may be one of the causes of the decrease in the operating rate of the game console. Therefore, the slot machine 10 has a characteristic configuration for eliminating the decrease in the operating rate due to the extinguishing of the eighth display segment N8. The configuration will be described below.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S2002, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, or after the process of step S2002 is executed, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the timing is before the start of the game. The timing before the start of the game is a state in which a bet number operation such as an operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 or a second credit insertion switch 57 or an operation of the medal insertion slot 45 can be performed, or a process for setting a replay state can be performed. Therefore, at the timing before the start of the game, a process of mainly setting an effect corresponding to a bet time command from the main control device 101 is performed. The bet-time command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet number operation, and is a command set in the BET process in step S204 of the normal process. In step S2004, a bet time effect setting process for setting an effect based on the current bet operation is executed based on the bet time command.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003, or after the process of step S2004 is executed, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not it is the start timing of the game after betting. The game start timing is a state in which the operation of the start lever 41 is enabled, and at the game start timing, a process of setting an effect corresponding to a start command from the main control device 101 is performed. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and corresponds to the lottery result in addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process. Precursor command set in processing (FIG. 30) and section display first processing (FIG. 46), 1st AT winning immediate notification command, 2nd AT winning immediate notification command, 2nd CZ mode start command, addition command, push order notification command , 1st CZ mode start command and the like. In step S2006, the start time effect setting process is executed based on these start time commands.

When a negative determination is made in step S2005, or after the process of step S2006 is executed, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating. When each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating, a process of setting an effect corresponding to each stop operation command from the main control device 101 is performed. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a command output from the main control device 101, and is step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). It is a stop command command set by. In step S2008, each stop operation effect setting process for performing the effect setting based on the current stop operation is executed based on each stop operation time command.

If a negative determination is made in step S2007, or after the process of step S2008 is executed, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. When all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, a process of setting an effect corresponding to a command at the time of all stops from the main control device 101 is performed. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S417 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to the commands, there are AT start command, CZ end command, first AT winning notification command, second AT winning notification command, AT end command, third CZ mode start command, etc. set in the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 43). In step S2010, the effect setting process at the time of all stops is executed based on these commands at the time of all stops.

If a negative determination is made in step S2009, or after the process of step S2010 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2011, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S2011, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like are controlled so that various effects set in each of the above effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timings. Further, in step S2011, the setting of the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than the bet time, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the clearing switch 59, etc.) is set, and the main control device 101 is not used. Settings for effects based on signals from sensors connected to (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), settings for error notification, etc. are performed.

Hereinafter, the start effect setting process and the all stop effect setting process will be described, and then the bet effect setting process will be described.

<Starting effect setting process>
The effect setting process at the start of step S2006 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a push order winning combination based on the received lottery result command. If the push order combination is won, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not the push order notification command has been received. When the push order notification command is received, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is normal rip B. When the push order notification command is set in the game which is the normal rip B, it means that the game is the start game of the first AT mode. In this case, the push order corresponding to the second replay winning in step S2104. Execute the setting process for performing the notification effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the lottery result of this game is normal lip C. When the push order notification command is set in the game which is the normal rip C, it means that the game is the start game of the second AT mode. In this case, the push order corresponding to the third replay prize in step S2106. Execute the setting process for performing the notification effect.

The case of making a negative judgment in step S2105 means that the lottery result of this game is the push order bell winning, and in this case, it corresponds to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination in step S2107. The setting for performing the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101 or step S2102, or after executing any of the processes of step S2104, step S2106, and step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not the wait period is currently being performed as a specific period before the elapse of the wait time. As described above, the wait time must not elapse from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the start of the game to the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the start of the next game. For example, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are configured to wait for the start of rotation. In this embodiment, the display control device 81 side as well as the main control device 101 indicates whether or not the wait time has elapsed, such as a timer counter. It is possible to judge at. If it is determined in step S2108 that the wait period has not elapsed, the process of turning on the weight display unit 78 is executed in step S2109, and then the process returns to step S2108. If the weight display unit 78 is already lit in step S2109, that state is maintained.

If it is determined in step S2108 that the wait period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2110 and the process of turning off the wait display unit 78 is executed. If the weight display unit 78 is already off, that state is maintained. After that, the process of setting the effect at the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of steps S211 to S2122 is executed. That is, the push order notification effect executed by steps S2101 to S2107 is executed even before the lapse of the wait period based on the operation of the start lever 41, while various types set in steps S211 to S2122. The effect at the start is not executed unless the wait period has elapsed even if the start lever 41 is operated, and is executed when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate.

For the sake of simplification of the explanation, when it is determined in step S2108 that the wait period has not elapsed, a loop process of waiting until the wait period elapses after executing the process of step S2109 will be described. However, the effect setting process at the start may be terminated. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the effect setting process at the start does not end until the wait period elapses. This point is the same for other loop processing.

As a process for setting an effect to be executed when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, first, in step S2111, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a specific winning combination. The specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is difficult to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game, and in this embodiment, chance eyes A to chance eyes C, cherry A to cherry C, and Watermelon is set as a specific role. As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, it is set so that the AT mode transition winning is more likely to be triggered by the lottery result other than the specific combination. If the lottery result of this game is a specific combination winning, the specific combination notification process is executed in step S2112. In the specific combination notification process, a setting is executed so that the specific combination notification that the lottery result of this game is one of the above specific combinations is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. As the specific combination notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), three characters of the exclamation mark are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided. The production is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2111, or after the process of step S2112 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2113. In step S2113, it is determined whether or not the addition command is received. When the addition command is received, the addition effect setting process is executed in step S2114. In the setting process of the additional effect, the additional effect of displaying the added number of games on the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed as a notification corresponding to the addition of the remaining number of games in the AT mode. The mode of the addition effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the addition is performed, and for example, the number of addition games is notified after a predetermined number of games triggered by the game in which the addition is performed. The aspect may be included, or for example, the so-called post-addition effect in which the addition effect is executed in a situation where the number of remaining games in the AT mode is a predetermined number (for example, the remaining one game) may include the aspect. ..

When a negative determination is made in step S2113, or after the process of step S2114 is executed, it is determined in step S2115 whether or not the first AT winning immediate notification command or the second AT winning immediate notification command is received. The first AT winning immediate notification command and the second AT winning immediate notification command are commands output from the main control device 101 when the AT mode transition lottery is won and the immediate notification lottery is won. When these commands are received, the setting for causing the corresponding AT winning immediate notification effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S2116. For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the AT winning immediate notification effect displays characters such as "AT confirmed !!" on the auxiliary display unit 65, and outputs a corresponding sound effect from the speaker 64. In the AT winning immediate notification effect, it is clearly indicated whether the first AT or the second AT is won based on the received immediate notification command. For example, the background color of the auxiliary display unit 65 in the AT winning immediate notification effect is different between the case where the first AT mode is won and the case where the second AT mode is won, so that the player can use any AT. It would be nice to be able to clearly see if you have won the mode. It should be noted that it is not specified whether the first AT or the second AT is won, and it is suggested by using the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. that the first AT is won or the second AT is won. It may be configured. By doing so, it is possible not to eliminate the playability of looking forward to which AT is won until the AT start game after the AT winning immediate notification effect.

When a negative determination is made in step S2115, or after the process of step S2116 is executed, it is determined in step S2117 whether or not a precursor command has been received. As described above, the precursory command is a case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process (FIG. 29) on the main control device 101 side, and is not won in the immediate notification lottery (step S1105: NO). ) This is a command output in the case, and in addition to the information that the AT mode winning flag is set, the number of games from the game (the game in which the AT mode winning flag is set) to the game for which the AT winning notification effect should be performed. Information (value of precursor counter) is included. When the precursor command is received, the precursor effect setting process is executed in step S2118.

In the precursor effect setting process, a process of setting a continuous effect that can be continuously executed over a plurality of games is performed as a precursor effect. In the continuous production in the present embodiment, the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified in the final game, and the continuous production set in the precursor effect setting process is the AT mode in the final game of the continuous production. Winning notification is set to be executed.

In the precursor effect setting process, if the display mode won in the AT mode transition lottery is not in the first CZ mode but in the second CZ mode, the third CZ mode, or the normal mode, the number of precursor games included in the precursor command is used. The continuous effect is set so that the notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is performed after the corresponding number of games. As already explained, the second CZ mode continues from 8 games to 15 games, and 13 to 15 games are set as the number of precursor games at the time of winning the AT mode transition. Therefore, after shifting to the 2nd CZ mode, AT The number of games until the notification of the winning / failing result of the mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is performed is any one of 13 games to 30 games. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is set to start when the mode shifts to the second CZ mode, and when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the second CZ mode, when the mode shifts to the second CZ mode. Notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) will be performed in the 13th to 30th games of the started continuous production. Further, the third CZ mode continues from 25 games to 30 games, and the number of remaining games in the third CZ mode is set as the number of precursor games as the number of precursor games at the time of winning the AT mode transition. That is, the number of games from the transition to the third CZ mode until the notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is performed is any one of 25 games to 30 games. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is set to start even when the mode shifts to the third CZ mode. When the AT mode transition lottery is won in the third CZ mode, when the mode shifts to the third CZ mode. Notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) will be performed from the 25th game to the 30th game of the started continuous production.

On the other hand, when the display mode won in the AT mode transition lottery is the first CZ mode, it is determined whether or not the continuous production has already started, and when the continuous production has not started, it is determined. , The continuous effect is set so that the notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is performed after the number of games corresponding to the number of precursor games included in the precursor command. Since the first CZ mode is performed from 8 games to 10 games, and if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the 1st CZ mode, the number of precursor games of 5 games is set, so that the 1st CZ mode is set. The number of games from the transition to the notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is any one of 5 games to 15 games. Further, when the display mode won in the AT mode transition lottery is the first CZ mode and the continuous production has already started, the number of remaining games of the continuous production is set to the number of precursor games this time. Perform processing. As described above, the continuous effect is set to start when the mode shifts to the second CZ mode, and further, in the present embodiment, when the second CZ mode does not win the AT mode transition lottery, the continuous effect is started. The production is set to be taken over. Therefore, the case where the continuous effect has already been started when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the first CZ mode means that the continuous effect started at the start of the second CZ mode has been taken over. As described above, since the second CZ mode continues from 8 games to 15 games, if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the 1st CZ mode via the 2nd CZ mode, continuous production is performed when shifting to the 2nd CZ mode. The number of games from the start of the game until the notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is performed is one of 13 games to 30 games, excluding the number of games in the normal section. .. That is, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the first CZ mode via the second CZ mode, assuming that the normal section is one game, the 14th to 31st games of the continuous production started at the transition of the second CZ mode. Notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) will be performed by eye.

In this case, in particular, in the case where the notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is performed in the continuous effect started at the time of the transition to the second CZ mode, the case is the case where the first CZ mode is not used. Notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is performed from the 13th game to the 30th game of the continuous production, and 31 games from the 14th game of the continuous production are performed via the first CZ mode. Notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) will be performed visually. Therefore, when the notification of the winning / failing result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is performed in the 13th game to the 30th game in the continuous production started at the time of the transition to the second CZ mode, whether or not the first CZ mode is used is used. That is, it is difficult to determine from the number of games of the continuous production whether or not the advantageous section has ended once. Although detailed description will be omitted, in the present embodiment, a game of continuous production of non-winning as a result of winning or failing the AT mode transition lottery according to the number of games in which such AT mode winning notification is performed. The number is set. Therefore, for example, when the continuous production is started in the second CZ mode, it is difficult to determine whether or not the advantageous section has ended during the continuous production from the content of the continuous production and the number of games, and the game is played at the end of the advantageous section. Is hard to finish.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, if a negative determination is made in step S2117, or after the process of step S2118 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2119. In step S2119, it is determined whether or not the first CZ mode start command or the second CZ mode start command is received. If any of the CZ mode start commands has been received, the CZ mode start setting process is executed in step S2120. When the first CZ mode start command is received, if the continuous effect is not continued, a new effect for the first CZ mode is started, and if the continuous effect is continued, the effect is concerned. Continue continuous production. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the continuous effect is started when the second CZ mode is started, and when the second CZ mode start command is received, the setting process for starting the CZ mode is started. In, the continuous production of a number of games longer than the total number of the number of continuous games in the second CZ mode and the number of continuous games in the first CZ mode that can be executed thereafter is set to be started. As a result, even if the CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the continuous production continues at the start of the first CZ mode (at the transition of the advantageous section). It becomes possible.

If a negative determination is made in step S2119, or after the process of step S2120 is executed, the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S2121. As described above, the continuous effect setting process sets the effect of each game of continuous effect that can be continued over a plurality of games in order to notify the winning / fail result of the AT mode transition lottery, or is used for the AT mode transition lottery. This is a process for setting a continuous effect when a player is not elected.

After that, in step S2122, other start-time effect setting processes are executed, and then the main start-time effect setting process ends. In step S2122, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set in response to the start of the game, or a process for turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted is performed.

<Production setting process when all are stopped>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of total stop in step S2010 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. As already explained, in the all-stop effect setting process, the newly received commands are the winning result command, AT start command, CZ end command, 1st AT winning notification command, 2nd AT winning notification command, AT end command, 3rd CZ. This is a process for setting the effect when the command is a command for stopping all, such as a mode start command.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the first AT winning notification command or the second AT winning notification command has been received. The first AT winning command and the second AT winning notification command are commands output from the main control device 101 side when the precursor counter becomes 0 after the AT mode winning flag is set. When these AT winning notification commands are received, the process proceeds to step S2202, and the setting is made so that the corresponding AT winning notification effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 as the bet time effect of the next game. To execute. The AT winning notification effect is an effect after notifying that the AT mode transition lottery has been won in the final game of the continuous effect set as described above. When setting as a battle effect in which the ally character wins in the battle effect, after executing the effect in which the ally character wins in the final game of the continuous effect, the effect that the ally character is pleased with when betting on the next game is set as the AT winning notification effect. You may. The AT winning notification effect set here is a bet number operation such as operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 or inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45 as the betting effect of the next game. Is executed when is done.

If it is determined in step S2201 that the AT winning notification command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the AT start command has been received. The case where the AT start command is received is the case where the push order notification effect for the second re-game or the third re-game is performed at the start of the game. In this case, in step S2204, the setting for performing the AT start effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the AT start effect is, for example, a re-game symbol for starting corresponding to the type of AT mode to be started this time on the auxiliary display unit 65 (in the case of the first AT mode, the second re-game). Along with the diagonal alignment of the corresponding "BAR" symbols (FIG. 14 (a)), etc., and the lower alignment of the "white 7" symbols corresponding to the third replay in the second AT mode (FIG. 14 (c)), etc. Characters such as "AT start !!" are displayed, and the corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 64.

If the AT start command has not been received in step S2203, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the AT end command has been received. When the AT end command is received, the setting for performing the AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S2206. For example, as shown in FIG. 55A, the AT end effect displays the number of continuous games in the current AT mode and the number of medals acquired in the current AT mode on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If the AT end command has not been received in step S2205, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the third CZ mode start command has been received. When the third CZ mode start command is received, the third CZ mode effect start process is executed in step S2208. In the effect start processing for the third CZ mode, the continuous effect is set to be started over the number of continuous games (25 games to 30 games) in the third CZ mode this time.

When it is determined in step S2207 that the third CZ mode start command has not been received, it is determined in step S2209 whether or not the CZ mode end command has been received. When the CZ end command is received, the effect setting process for CZ end is executed in step S2210. In the effect setting process for ending CZ, when the CZ mode to be terminated this time is the second CZ mode, the continuous effect being executed is set to be continued. Further, when the CZ mode to be terminated this time is the first CZ mode, the first CZ mode is the first CZ mode via the second CZ mode, that is, the continuous effect of the second CZ mode is taken over and the first CZ mode is in progress. When the effect is performed, the continuous effect is terminated as it is, and when the first CZ mode is the first CZ mode that does not go through the second CZ mode, the continuous effect set in the first CZ mode is continued. To set. Then, when the CZ mode to be terminated this time is the third CZ mode, the continuous effect set in the third CZ mode is set to be terminated as it is.

If the CZ mode end command has not been received in step S2209, or after executing any of the processes of step S2202, step S2204, step S2206, step S2208 and step S2210, the current game is performed in step S2211. The process of temporarily storing the information on the game result (information on the lottery result and the presence or absence of winning) and the information on the number of bets in this game is executed. Then, in step S2212, the other all-stop effect setting process is executed, and then the all-stop effect setting process ends. In step S2212, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light in a color corresponding to the winning combination, the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. The sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet of is controlled so as to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal section shifts to the advantageous section through the advantageous section transition lottery, and by winning the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section, the transition to the AT mode occurs and many medals are won. In the expected playability, the transition to the AT mode is made to occur mainly through the CZ mode, and the subsequent contents of the continuous production set in the CZ mode are not predicted by the end of the advantageous section. I try to do it. In this case, the AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the CZ mode, and is executed according to the lottery result of each game. However, if the lottery result of each game is a specific role as a so-called rare role, the AT mode transition is made. It is set so that it is easy to win, and if it is any other result, it is difficult to win the AT mode transition.

As described above, the specific roles in this embodiment are chance eyes A to chance C, cherry A to cherry C, and watermelon, and among them, watermelon is a so-called small role result in which medals are paid out by winning a prize. On the other hand, Chance A to Chance C and Cherry A to Cherry C are the results of winning the replay result. By setting a specific role using the re-game result in this way, it is possible to diversify the specific role simply by increasing the types of the re-game result, and the re-game result does not increase or decrease the medals. If so, it is possible to set a specific role while suppressing the influence on the payout rate. Furthermore, as in the case of normal rips A to C, the first re-game result prize is basically established, but the second re-game result prize and the third re-game result prize are obtained at a predetermined timing (at the start of the AT mode). It is also possible to make the winning result and the stop result different without changing the privilege given by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, such as establishing the re-game result winning, and use it for the game. .. Further, for example, it is possible to improve the appearance rate of a specific combination by using an RT state or the like that improves the winning probability of the re-game result, and the specific combination or the like is configured by using the re-game result. This has a great advantage in improving the interest of the game.

However, if the specific role is composed of the small role result and the replay result as described above, the player must bet himself / herself in the next game if the result is a small role, whereas the replay game is required. In the case of the result, no bet is required due to the process of automatically inserting the virtual medal, and the progress mode of the game is significantly different. Therefore, if a specific role winning is established based on the result of the re-game, the difference from the result of the small role may give the player a strong sense of discomfort, which may be a barrier to the smooth progress of the game, and the discomfort may motivate the player to play. There is also the possibility of lowering it.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the notification mode when the winning of the result composed of the replay result of such a specific combination is established is devised. Hereinafter, the mode of notification when the result is a re-game will be described. In the following description, the first re-game result is also referred to as a normal re-game result, and the re-game result other than the first re-game result is also referred to as a specific re-game result.

<BET display and bet display>
As shown in FIG. 1, the game panel 25 is provided with a bet display unit 34 on the left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, and a BET display unit 75 on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Is provided.

As shown in FIG. 56, the BET display unit 75 has a first BET display unit 75a, a second BET display unit 75b, and a third BET display unit 75c. Each of the display units 75a to 75c is configured to be switchable between a lit state (or a blinking state) and an extinguished state, and the number of bets is notified by the BET display units 75a to 75c which are in the lit state. For example, in the BET display unit 75, when the first BET display unit 75a and the second BET display unit 75b are in the lit state and the third BET display unit 75c is in the off state, two bets are placed. It also means that three bets have been placed when all the BET display units 75a to 75c are in the lit state.

As shown in FIG. 1, the bet display unit 34 also has a first bet display unit 34a, a second bet display unit 34b, and a third bet display unit 34c, and all of the bet display units 34a to 34c are lit. It is configured to be able to switch between (or blinking state) and off state. The point that the number of bets is notified by the bet display units 34a to 34c that are in the lit state is also the same as the above-mentioned BET display unit 75.

However, as shown in FIG. 16, the BET display unit 75 is connected to the main control device 101, the bet display unit 34 is connected to the display control device 81, and the BET display unit 75 is on the main control device 101 side. The bet display unit 34 is controlled by the CPU 102, whereas the bet display unit 34 is controlled by the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the area of the area where the bet display unit 34 transmits light in the game panel 25 when the display units 34 and 75 are lit is larger than that of the BET display unit 75. It is set to be large, and the bet display unit 34 is set so as to be easier for the player to catch the eye (easier to grasp) than the BET display unit 75. It should be noted that the bet display unit 34 may have a configuration that is easier for the player to catch the eye (easier for the player to grasp) than the BET display unit 75, and the brightness and the amount of light in the lighting state are increased. The bet display unit 34 may be configured by an operable accessory or the like, or the bet number may be displayed by the bet display unit 34 on the auxiliary display unit 65. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the game state display unit 76 is a display unit smaller than the bet display unit 34 and the first credit insertion switch 56, like the BET display unit 75. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 56, a replay state display unit 76a, a startable state display unit 76b, and an acceptable state display unit 76c are provided, and all of the display units 76a to 76c are in the lit state. It is configured so that it can be switched to the off state. The re-game status display unit 76a is for notifying that the re-game state is set so that the next game can be executed with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the current game, and the re-game state is displayed. When it is set to, it is turned on, and when the game set in the replay state is finished, it is turned off. The startable state display unit 76b is for notifying that the startable state is ready to accept the start operation of the game, and is turned on when the startable state is set, and is in the startable state. When the start operation is accepted, the light is turned off. The acceptable state display unit 76c is for notifying that the medal can be inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 in the acceptable state, and is turned on when the medal is acceptable, and the medal is inserted. If it is not accepted, it will be turned off. More specifically about the acceptable state display unit 76c, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 is guided to the storage passage 47 side, and is turned on when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side. When the passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, the light is turned off.

<Processing for BET>
Next, the BET process performed in step S204 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the game result of the previous game is a re-game result winning. Such processing can be determined based on the information of the previous game stored in the medal payout processing in step S214. In the case of the next game in which any of the re-game results winning is established, in step S2302, it is determined whether or not the winning re-game result is the first re-game result as the normal re-game result. The normal replay result prize can be won when the normal rip A to the normal rip C are won, and when the normal rip A to the normal rip C are won, the stop operation of the right reel 32R is performed first. Unless done, basically, the winning result of the normal replay is established (Fig. 39). In the case of the next game of the game in which the normal re-game winning is established, the process of setting the normal re-game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S2303. On the other hand, in the case of the next game of the game in which the re-game result winning other than the first re-game result as the specific re-game result is established, the process of setting the specific re-game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S2304. do.

The processes of steps S2301 to S2304 may be performed by the medal payout process or the payout determination process.

After executing the process of step S2303 or step S2304, the process proceeds to step S2305, the number of bets of the previous game is grasped from the BET counters provided in the various counter areas 106e, and the value of the BET counter is temporarily stored in a register or the like. Execute the process to memorize. The BET counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of bets bet.

When a negative determination is made in step S2301, or after the process of step S2305 is executed, the BET counter is cleared in step S2506. Then, in step S2307, a process of grasping the specified number of sheets of the current game is executed. As already explained, the specified number of bets is the number of bets that enable the game to be executed. In any BB state, the specified number is 3, and in the normal gaming state other than the BB state, the specified number is 2. Three sheets are set as the specified number of sheets.

In the following step S2308, a process of turning on the acceptable status display unit is executed. Then, in step S2309, it is determined whether or not the game is the next game in which the normal re-game flag or the specific re-game flag is set and any of the re-game result prizes is established, and the re-game result prize is established. In the case of the next game, the re-game setting process is executed in step S2310.

<Process for re-game setting>
In the re-game setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58, first, in step S2401, a process of turning on the re-game status display unit is executed. In the following step S2402, a process of turning off all BET display units is executed. Then, in step S2403, it is determined whether or not the specific re-game flag is set, and if the next game is not set and the normal re-game result winning is established, the normal BET command is set in step S2404. Is executed as an output target to the display control device 81. The normal BET command is a command for controlling the bet display unit 34 on the display control device 81 side.

After setting the normal BET command, the process proceeds to step S2405. Steps S2405 to S2410 are processes for automatically inserting virtual medals based on the normal replay result winning. That is, in step S2405, a process of adding 1 to the BET counter is executed, and a process of setting the BET display unit corresponding to the BET counter as a result of this addition in step S2406 to a lighting state (or a blinking state) is executed. Specifically, if the BET counter is 1 as a result of the process of step S2405, the first BET display unit 75a is turned on, if the BET counter is 2, the second BET display unit 75b is turned on, and the BET counter is 3. If so, the third BET display unit 75c is turned on. Then, in step S2407, a process of setting the replay BET command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The re-game BET command is a command for turning on the bet display unit 34 on the display control device 81 side in conjunction with the lighting process of the BET display unit 75 in step S2406.

In the following step S2408, a process of inputting 134 to the BET timer provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BET timer is a counter for defining the interval for automatically inserting virtual medals, and the BET timer is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, and the value input in step S2408 is about 0. It becomes 0 after 2 sec.

In step S2409, the BET timer becomes 0, and it is determined whether or not about 0.2 sec has elapsed since the process of step S2408 was executed. If not, the process waits until it has elapsed. When about 0.2 sec has elapsed and a positive determination is made in step S2409, it is determined in step S2410 whether or not the value of the BET counter is equal to the number of bets of the previous game temporarily stored in step S2305. If the number of bets in the previous game has not been reached, the process returns to step S2405 and the process of automatically inserting virtual medals is executed again. When the value of the BET counter reaches the number of bets in the previous game, a positive determination is made in step S2410, and the process proceeds to step S2411.

In step S2411, a process of setting a bet end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The bet end command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that a series of bets have been completed, and includes information on the current number of bets. In the following step S2412, a process of setting a startable flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. The startable flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the start operation of the start lever 41 is ready to be accepted. In other words, when the start start flag is not set, even if the start operation of the start lever 41 is performed, it is not accepted. Further, as described above, the slot machine 10 has a wait period set, and the startable flag is set so that it can be set before the wait period elapses. That is, the start enable flag is set, and the start operation of the start lever 41 can be accepted. Even if the start operation of the start lever 41 is performed, the start operation is accepted while the reels 32L and 32M are accepted. , 32R rotation start control may wait until the elapse of the wait period.

After executing the process of step S2412, in step S2413, the process of turning on the startable state display unit 76b is executed, and then the process for setting the re-game is terminated. By turning on the startable state display unit 76b, the player can grasp that the start operation of the start lever 41 has been accepted.

On the other hand, if the specific re-game flag is set in step S2403 and the next game is the next game in which the specific re-game result winning is established, the process proceeds to step S2414. In step S2414, a process of setting a specific BET command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The specific BET command is a command for controlling the bet display unit 34 on the display control device 81 side.

In the following step S2415, a process of inputting the bet number of the previous game to the BET counter is executed. Then, in step S2416, a process of turning on the BET display units 75a to 75c corresponding to the value input to the BET counter is executed. That is, when 1 is input to the BET counter in step S2415, only the first BET display unit 75a is turned on, and when 2 is input to the BET counter, the first BET display unit 75a and the second BET display unit 75b are turned on. On the other hand, the third BET display unit 75c maintains the off state, and when 3 is input to the BET counter, all the BET display units 75a to 75c are turned on.

After executing the process of step S2416, the process proceeds to step S2411, the process of setting the bet end command and the startable flag is executed, the process of turning on the startable state display unit 76b is executed, and then this process is performed again. End the game setting process.

That is, the process of automatically inserting a virtual medal based on the re-game result winning is completed in a shorter time in the case of automatically inserting based on the specific re-game result winning than in the case of automatically inserting based on the normal re-game result winning. Is set to.

Returning to the description of the BET process, if any of the re-game flags is not set in step S2309, or after the re-game setting process is executed in step S2310, the process proceeds to step S2311. The processes of steps S231 to S2319 are processes for inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45 and setting bets and credits by operating the credit insertion switches 56 and 57.

That is, in step S2311, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is the upper limit value (50). The credit counter corresponds to the credit displayed on the credit display unit 60, and corresponds to the virtual game medium storage means possessed by the CPU 102. If the credit counter has not reached the upper limit, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited in step S2312 so that the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the storage passage 47 side. On the other hand, when the credit counter is the upper limit value, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is set to the non-excited state in step S2313 so that the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the discharge passage 48 side.

After executing the process of step S2312 or step S2313, the process proceeds to step S2314. The processes of steps S2314 to S2319 are processes when a bet number operation such as medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 45, operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 is performed.

That is, in step S2314, it is determined whether or not a medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot 45. In the present embodiment, the medal is inserted on the upstream side (medal insertion slot 45 side) of the selector 46 provided with the medal passage switching solenoid 46a in the passage through which the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 passes. Is provided with a inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the CPU 102 can determine that a medal has been inserted based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. When a medal is inserted, the medal insertion handling process is executed in step S2315.

If no medal has been inserted, the process proceeds to step S2316, and it is determined whether or not the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated based on the detection result of the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a. When the first credit input switch 56 is operated, the first operation correspondence process is executed in step S2317.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is not operated, it is determined in step S2318 whether or not the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated based on the detection result of the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a. When the second credit input switch 57 is operated, the second operation correspondence process is executed in step S2319.

After executing any of the processes of step S2315, step S2317 and step S2319, or after making a negative determination in step S2318, it is determined in step S2320 whether the startable flag is set and set. If not, the process returns to step S2311, and if the startable flag is set, the BET process is terminated.

Hereinafter, the medal insertion corresponding process, the first operation corresponding process, and the second operation corresponding process will be described.

<Processing for inserting medals>
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59, the medal insertion handling process first determines whether or not the specific replay flag is set. If the specific re-game flag is not set and the specific re-game result winning is not established in the previous game, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the normal re-game flag is set. If the normal re-game flag is not set and the normal re-game result has not been won in the previous game, that is, if the current state is not set to the re-game state, the process proceeds to step S2503 and the BET counter is specified. Determine if the number of sheets has been reached. As described above, the specified number of games this time is grasped in step S2307. Further, in any of the BB states, 3 sheets are set as the specified number of sheets, and in states other than the BB state, 2 sheets and 3 sheets are set as the specified number of sheets. In step S2503, the BET counter is set in the BB state. When is 3, an affirmative determination is made, and in a state other than the BB state, it is determined whether or not the specified number of the two or three specified sheets is reached. That is, in a state other than the BB state, an affirmative judgment is made when the BET counter is 3.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, a process of adding 1 to the BET counter is executed in step S2504. In other words, when the specified number of 2 and 3 cards is set, 3 cards can be inserted by inserting another medal from the state where the specified number of 2 cards (2-bet game) can be started. It is possible to start a predetermined number of games (3-bet game).

In the following step S2505, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has reached the specified number of medals by inserting the medal this time. When the specified number of sheets has been reached, it is determined in step S2506 whether or not the startable flag is set. If the startable flag is not set, the process of setting the startable flag is executed in step S2507, and the process of turning on the startable state display unit 76b is executed in step S2508.

When it is determined in step S2505 that the number of BET counters has not reached the specified number, when the startable flag is set in step S2506, or when the startable status display unit 76b is turned on in step S2508. After that, in step S2509, the process of setting the input BET command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for inserting this medal is completed. The insertion BET command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the bet has been set by inserting the medal this time.

When it is determined in step S2502 that the specific re-game flag is not set but the normal re-game flag is set, or in step S2503 it is determined that the BET counter has reached the specified number of sheets and the BB state is in progress. If the BET counter is 3, or if the BET counter is 3 during a state other than the BB state, the process proceeds to step S2510. In step S2510, it is determined whether or not the credit counter is 50. If the credit counter is not 50, the process of adding 1 to the credit counter is executed in step S2511, and the process of setting the input increase command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S2512. Then, in step S2513, it is determined whether or not the credit counter has reached 50 based on the result of the process of step S2511, and if it reaches 50, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited in step S2514. The state is set, and the process of turning off the acceptable state display unit 76c is executed in step S2515, and then the process for inserting the medal is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2510 or a negative determination is made in step S2513, the medal insertion correspondence process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the specific re-game flag is set in step S2501 and the specific re-game result winning is established in the previous game, the process proceeds to step S2516 and the specific input command is sent to the display control device 81. Executes the process of setting as the output target of. The specific throwing command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the medal has been thrown in the replay state set based on the specific replay result winning. After executing the process of step S2516, the process proceeds to step S2510, and the process for increasing credit is executed on condition that the credit counter has not reached 50.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the credit counter by inserting medals even in the situation where the replay state is set, and in particular, the replay set based on the specific replay result winning. In the game state, a specific insertion command is output by inserting a medal. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the specific input command is received will be described in detail later.

<Processing for the first operation>
In the first operation corresponding process, which is the process when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 60, it is determined in step S2601 whether or not the specific replay flag is set. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the normal replay flag is set. If the specific re-game flag is not set, the normal re-game flag is set, and the normal re-game result winning is established in the previous game, the bet is placed by operating the first credit insertion switch 56. Since it is not broken, the process corresponding to the first operation is terminated as it is. If neither the specific re-game flag nor the normal re-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the credit counter is 1 or more and one or more virtual medals are stored. If the credit counter is less than 1 and the virtual medal is not stored, the bet is not made even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, so that the first operation corresponding process is terminated as it is. If the credit counter is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S2604, and it is determined whether or not the current BET counter is a specific number. As described above, the specific number of sheets is the number of sheets to be bet when the first credit insertion switch 56 of the specified number of sheets is operated, and the specific number of sheets is set to 3 in the BB state, and the BB In the non-internal state before the BB winning, which is not the state, the specific number is set to 2, and in the internal state other than the BB state and after the BB winning, the specific number is set to 3. See FIG. 24). When the current BET counter corresponds to a specific number of sheets, a new bet is not made even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, so that the first operation corresponding process is terminated as it is.

If the number of BET counters is not a specific number, in step S2605, a process of setting a normal first operation command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. Normally, the first operation command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated in a situation other than the replay state and the credit counter is 1 or more.

In the following step S2606, a process of subtracting 1 from the credit counter is executed based on the operation of the first credit input switch 56 this time. Then, in step S2607, a process of adding 1 to the BET counter is executed, and in step S2608, a process of turning on the corresponding BET display units 75a to 75c is executed.

In the following step S2609, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has reached a specific number of sheets by the process of step S2606. If it has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S2610, and it is determined whether or not the credit counter is 1 or more. When the credit counter is 1 or more and further betting is possible by the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 this time, the process of inputting 67 to the BET timer is executed in step S2611. As described above, the BET timer is a counter for defining the interval for automatically inserting virtual medals, and the value input in step S2611 becomes 0 after about 0.1 sec. That is, when the virtual medal is inserted by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the virtual medal is inserted at an interval shorter than the interval (about 0.2 sec) when the virtual medal is automatically inserted in the re-game setting process. Is done.

In step S2612, the BET timer becomes 0, and it is determined whether or not about 0.1 sec has elapsed since the process of step S2611 was executed. If not, the process waits until it has elapsed. When about 0.1 sec has elapsed and an affirmative determination is made in step S2612, the process of setting the continuous bet command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S2613, and then the process returns to step S2606. The continuous bet command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that a plurality of bets are made by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 and the timing of the bets. In this case, the processes of steps S2606 to S2613 are repeated until the number of BET counters reaches a specific number (step S2609: YES) or the credit counter becomes 0 (step S2610: NO).

When the number of BET counters reaches a specific number in step S2609, the process proceeds to step S2614. In step S2614, a process of setting the bet end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. As described above, the bet end command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that a series of bets have been completed. Then, in step S2615, the process of setting the startable flag is executed, and in step S2616, the process of turning on the startable state display unit 76b is executed, and then the first operation corresponding process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2610 that the credit counter has become 0, the process proceeds to step S2617, the process of setting the above bet end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process corresponding to the first operation. To finish.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the specific replay flag is set, the first operation is performed after the process of setting the specific first operation command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S2618. End the corresponding process. That is, in the re-game state set based on the establishment of the specific re-game result winning, the bet is not placed when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, but the output setting of the specific first operation command is performed. Will be. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the specific first operation command is received will be described in detail later.

<Processing for the second operation>
In the second operation corresponding process, which is the process when the second credit input switch 57 is operated, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, it is determined in step S2701 whether or not the specific replay flag is set. In step S2702, it is determined whether or not the normal replay flag is set. If the specific re-game flag is not set, the normal re-game flag is set, and the normal re-game result winning is established in the previous game, the bet is placed by operating the second credit insertion switch 57. Since it is not broken, the process corresponding to the second operation is terminated as it is. If neither the specific re-game flag nor the normal re-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the credit counter is 1 or more and one or more virtual medals are stored. If the credit counter is less than 1 and the virtual medal is not stored, the bet is not made even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, so that the second operation corresponding process is terminated as it is.

When the credit counter is 1 or more, it is determined in step S2704 whether or not the number of BET counters is the specified number. If the number is not the specified number, the process proceeds to step S2705 to execute a process of normally setting the second operation command as an output target to the display control device 81. Normally, the second operation command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated in a situation where the game is not in the replay state.

In the following step S2706, a process of adding 1 to the BET counter is executed, and in step S2707, a process of subtracting 1 from the credit counter is executed. Then, in step S2708, the process of turning on the corresponding BET display units 75a to 75c is executed.

In the following step S2709, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has reached the specified number of sheets by the process of step S2706, and if the specified number of sheets is reached, the process of setting the startable flag is executed in step S2710, and the step. After executing the process of turning on the startable state display unit 76b in S2711, the second operation corresponding process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2709 that the number of BET counters has not reached the specified number, the second operation corresponding process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S2704 that the number of BET counters is a specific number, that is, if the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 is performed even though the number of BET counters is the specified number, the process proceeds to step S2712. In step S2712, it is determined whether or not the BET counter is 3. That is, in the gaming state in which the specified number of sheets is set to 2 and 3, when the BET counter is 3 and the affirmative judgment is made in step S2704, the affirmative judgment is also made in step S2712 and the BET counter is 2. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, a negative determination is made in step S2712. If a negative determination is made in step S2712 and the BET counter is 2, the process proceeds to step S2705, further bets are made, and each process corresponding to setting the BET counter to 3 is executed. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S2709, and the startable flag is not set, but the startable flag is set before that (when the BET counter becomes 2).

When the second credit insertion switch 57 is further operated in the situation where 3 is input to the BET counter in step S2712, the BET counter is set to 1 according to the value of the credit counter (1 from the state of 3 bets). Switch to the state of a single bet) or not. That is, in step S2713, it is determined whether or not the credit counter is less than 49 and the credit counter can tolerate an increase of two virtual medals when switching from the state of three bets to the state of one bet. If the credit counter is less than 49 in step S2713, the process proceeds to step S2714 to execute the process of setting the above-mentioned normal second operation command as an output target to the display control device 81. After that, 1 is input to the BET counter in step S2715, and the process of increasing the credit counter by 2 is executed in step S2716.

In the following step S2717, a process of turning off the second BET display unit 75b and the third BET display unit 75c (making the BET display unit 75 a state of indicating one bet) is executed. Then, in step S2719, a process of turning off the startable state display unit 76b is executed.

In the following step S2720, it is determined whether or not the credit counter has reached 50, and if it reaches 50, a process of deactivating the medal passage switching solenoid 46a in step S2721 is executed, and in step S2722. After executing the process of turning off the acceptable state display unit 76c, the second operation corresponding process is terminated. If the credit counter is not 50 in step S2720, the second operation corresponding process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the specific replay flag is set, the second operation is performed after the process of setting the specific second operation command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S2723. End the corresponding process. That is, in the re-gaming state set based on the establishment of the specific re-game result winning, the bet is not made even when not only the first credit insertion switch 56 but also the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated. The output of the specific second operation command is set. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the specific second operation command is received will be described in detail later.

<Processing for game status display>
Next, the process for the game state display unit in step S209 in the normal process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62. As described above, the game status display unit processing is a processing performed after the BET processing and the like and then the operation of the start lever 41 is performed, and the game status display unit is performed before the processing. Of the 76, the startable state display unit 76b and the acceptable state display unit 76c are in the lit state. Further, when any of the re-game result winnings is established in the previous game, the re-game state is set and the re-game state display unit 76a is also lit.

In the game status display unit processing, first, in step S2801, the process of turning off the startable status display unit 76b is executed. Then, in step S2802, the process of turning off the acceptable state display unit 76c is executed, and the process for the game state display unit is terminated.

That is, after the acceptable state display unit 76c is turned on (step S2308), a predetermined number of bets are placed and the startable state display unit 76b is turned on (step S2413, step S2508, step S2616, step). S2711) After that, when the start lever 41 is operated, the acceptable state display unit 76c and the startable state display unit 76b are turned off. However, as described above, the slot machine 10 has a wait period set, and even if the start lever 41 is operated, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may not be started immediately. In this case, the timing at which the acceptable status display unit 76c and the startable status display unit 76b are turned off is not when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts, but when the start lever 41 is operated. The player should clearly understand that the start operation has already been accepted and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are in the state of waiting for the rotation start (wait period), and the bet number operation and the start operation are not required again. Is possible.

<Bet production setting process>
Next, the bet-time effect setting process in step S2004 in the effect setting process (FIG. 51) on the display control device 81 side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63. The bet time effect setting process switches each bet display unit 34a to 34c from the off state to the on state when the bet number operation is set or is set to the re-game state, and outputs the bet sound effect. This is a process for finally making the current number of bets notified by the bet display unit 34. In the following description, the effect in which the current number of bets is finally notified by the bet display unit 34 is referred to as a bet-compatible effect, and each bet display unit 34a to the bet-compatible effect is reached. The effect of switching the state of 34c or outputting a sound effect is also referred to as a bet process effect (specific notification).

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not the game result of the previous game is one of the re-game result winnings. If any of the re-game results is won, in step S2902, the re-game state bet effect setting process is executed. The game result information of the previous game is stored in step S2211 in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not the re-game result is won based on the stored game result information. It is possible. By the way, when the game result of the previous game is not a prize for the re-game result, or when the information of the game result of the previous game is not stored (erased) like the first game after reset such as RAM clear. ), The process proceeds to step S2903.

In step S2903, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit provided in the various counter areas 183b is 1 or more. The credit corresponds to the credit counter on the main control device 101 side. When the credit is 1 or more, the process of turning on the first credit lamp 56b is executed. By turning on the first credit lamp 56b, the player can clearly grasp that the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is accepted. The first credit lamp 56b may be set to blink.

If a negative determination is made in step S2903, or after the process of step S2904 is executed, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not the input BET command or the normal second operation command is received as the bet time command this time. do. When the inserted BET command or the normal second operation command is received, one medal is inserted or one virtual medal is inserted in a state of not being in the re-gaming state or the re-gaming state based on the normal re-game result. This means that the bet number operation is performed, and in this case, the single bet effect setting process is executed in step S2906.

When the input BET command and the normal second operation command have not been received, it is determined in step S2907 whether or not the normal first operation command has been received. The case where the normal first operation command is received means that the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed in a state of not being in the re-gaming state or the re-gaming state based on the normal re-game result. In this case, the continuous bet effect setting process is executed in step S2908.

Normally, when the second operation command is not received, or after executing any of the processes of step S2902, step S2906, and step S2908, it is determined in step S2909 whether or not the input increase command is received. .. The case where the input increase command is received means that the credit counter has increased with the insertion of medals. In this case, the sound effect for increasing the credit is controlled to be output from the speaker 64 in step S2910. ..

After making a negative determination in step S2909 or executing the process of step S2910, another bet time effect setting process is executed in step S2911, and then the main bet time effect setting process ends. In step S2911, for example, the AT winning notification effect set in step S2202 may be executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 based on the bet number operation this time, or the bet number operation may be performed in a continuous effect or the like. When the production is developed based on the above, processing for executing the production for the development is performed.

Hereinafter, the single bet effect setting process and the continuous bet effect setting process will be described, and then the bet effect setting process for the replay state will be described.

<Single bet production setting process>
The single bet effect setting process is a process performed when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 or the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated in a state other than the replay state. In the single bet effect setting process, a process of performing an effect that a bet has been made is also executed on the bet display unit 34 side in correspondence with the bet being made in the second operation corresponding process on the main control device 101 side. .. The bet effect that matches the bet of the second operation corresponding process on the main control device 101 side is also referred to as a single bet effect.

In the single bet effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 64, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the turned-off flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The extinguished flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that some kind of bet (including automatic insertion at the time of setting to the replay state) has already been made in this game. If the turned-off flag is not set, the process of setting the turned-off flag is executed in step S3002.

In the following step S3003, a process of turning off all the bet display units 34a to 34c is executed. Then, in step S3004, a process of turning on the first bet display unit 34a is executed. In this case, although the first bet display unit 34a is temporarily turned off, it is turned on immediately after that. In such a turned-off state, it is not possible or grasped that the player is turned off. It is set to continue to the extent that it is difficult. The first bet display unit 34a may not be turned off when all the bet display units 34a to 34c in step S3003 are turned off.

After that, in step S3005, the bet sound effect is controlled to be output from the speaker 64, and then the single bet effect setting process is terminated. In addition, it is good that the bet sound effect and the above-mentioned sound effect for increasing credits are different sound effects to the extent that the player can identify them. It is preferable to let you know.

If the extinguished flag is set in step S3001, the process proceeds to step S3006. In step S3006, it is determined whether or not the third bet display unit 34c has been lit before the current bet number operation is performed. When the third bet display unit 34c is in the lit state, the process of turning the first credit lamp 56b into the lit state is executed in step S3007. The first credit lamp 56b may be set to blink. After that, the process proceeds to step S3003, and once all the bet display units 34a to 34c are turned off, the first bet display unit 34a is turned on (step S3004). As a result, the state in which three medals are bet is switched to the state in which one medal is bet, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to make another bet. Can be grasped by the player. If the first credit lamp 56b is already lit in step S3007, that state is maintained.

When it is determined in step S3006 that the third bet display unit 34c is not in the lit state, the process of turning the bet display units 34a to 34c corresponding to the current bet into the lit state is executed in step S3008. Then, in step S3009, it is determined whether or not the third bet display unit 34c is in the lit state, and if it is in the lit state, the specified number of cards in this game is set to 3 in step S3010. Judge whether or not. If the specific number of cards is 3 and the number of bets is 3, no further bet is required. Therefore, in step S3011, the process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed, and then the process is executed. The bet sound effect output process is executed in step S3005, and then the single bet effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the third bet display unit 34c is not lit by the process of step S3008 (step S3009: NO), or when the lit state is lit but the specific number of sheets is two instead of three. The first credit lamp 56b is maintained in the lit state, the bet sound effect output process is executed in step S3005, and then the single bet effect setting process is terminated.

<Continuous bet production setting process>
Next, the continuous bet effect setting process in step S2908 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The continuous bet effect setting process is a process performed when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a state other than the replay state. In the continuous bet effect setting process, a process of performing an effect that a bet has been made is also executed on the bet display unit 34 side in correspondence with the bet being made in the first operation corresponding process on the main control device 101 side. .. It should be noted that the bet effect according to the bet of the first operation corresponding process on the main control device 101 side is also referred to as a continuous bet effect.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not the extinguished flag is set. If the turned-off flag is not set, the process of setting the turned-off flag is executed in step S3102. Then, in step S3103, a process of turning off all the bet display units 34a to 34c is executed.

In the following step S3104, a process of turning on the first bet display unit 34a is executed, and in step S3105, the bet sound effect is controlled to be output from the speaker 64.

In the following step S3106, it is determined whether or not the bet end command has been received from the main control device 101. If the bet end command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S3107 and waits until the continuous bet command is received. As described above, the continuous bet command is a command output when making one bet and then making the next bet when making a plurality of bets based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. It is output about 0.1 sec after making one bet. Upon receiving the continuous bet command, an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, and the process proceeds to step S3108.

In step S3108, the process of turning on the second bet display unit 34b is executed, and in the subsequent step S3109, the bet sound effect is controlled to be output from the speaker 64.

Then, it is confirmed in step S3110 whether or not the bet end command is received again, and if not, it waits until the continuous bet command is received in step S3111. Upon receiving the continuous bet command, an affirmative determination is made in step S3111, and the process proceeds to step S3112. In step S3112, a process of turning on the third bet display unit 34c is executed, and in step S3113, the bet sound effect is controlled to be output from the speaker 64.

When the bet end command is received in step S3106 or step S3110, or after the process of step S3113 is executed, the process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed in step S3114, and then the continuous bet is executed. End the effect setting process.

If it is determined in step S3101 that the extinguished flag is set and the bet number operation is performed by the first credit insertion switch 56 after some bet has already been made, the process proceeds to step S3115 and each bet display unit. Of the 34a to 34c, it is determined whether or not only the first bet display unit 34a is in the lighting state. The first bet display unit 34a is lit, the second bet display unit 34b and the third bet display unit 34c are off, and a bet by the first credit insertion switch 56 is made with one medal bet. When the number operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S3108 to turn on the second bet display unit 34b and the third bet display unit 34c.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3115 that the lights other than the first bet display unit 34a are lit, the process proceeds to step S3116, and the first bet display unit 34a and the second bet display unit 34b are lit and the third bet display unit 34b is lit. It is determined whether or not the bet display unit 34c is in the off state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3116 and the bet number operation is performed by the first credit insertion switch 56 with two medals bet, the process proceeds to step S3112 and the third bet display unit 34c is turned on. Perform processing. When a negative determination is made in step S3116 and the bet number operation is performed by the first credit insertion switch 56 with three medals bet, three medals are bet although the specific number is two. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3103 to turn on the first bet display unit 34a and the second bet display unit 34b.

<Bet effect setting process for replay state>
Next, the bet effect setting process for the replay state in step S2902 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bet effect setting process for the re-game state is a process executed when the game result of the previous game is one of the re-game result winnings, and the effect differs depending on the type of the winning re-game result.

That is, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the specific BET command has been received. If the specific BET command has not been received and the game result of the previous game is the normal re-game result winning, the normal re-game bet effect setting process is executed in step S3202, and then the re-game state bet effect is produced. End the setting process. On the other hand, if a specific BET command has been received and a specific replay result winning has been established in the previous game, whether or not the AT winning notification effect is set as the bet time effect in step S3203. Is determined. As described above, the AT winning notification effect as the bet time effect is the effect set in step S2202 in the stop time effect setting process of the previous game. If the AT winning notification effect is not set, the specific re-game bet effect setting process is executed in step S3204, and then the re-game state bet effect setting process ends. On the other hand, when the AT winning notification effect is set as the bet time effect this time, the bet corresponding effect setting process is executed in step S3205, and then the bet effect setting process for the replay state is terminated.

<Normal re-game bet production setting process>
First, the normal replay bet effect setting process in step S3202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67. In the normal re-game bet effect setting process, the bet is placed on the bet display unit 34 side in correspondence with the bet number equal to the bet number of all games in the re-game setting process on the main control device 101 side. Executes the process for producing the effect of what has been done. In the following description, the bet effect according to the bet of the re-game setting process on the main control device 101 side is also referred to as the re-game bet effect.

In step S3301, a process of turning off all the bet display units 34a to 34c is executed. In the following step S3302, a process of setting the turned-off flag is executed. Then, in step S3303, the process of turning on the first bet display unit 34a is executed, and in step S3304, the bet sound effect is controlled to be output from the speaker 64.

In the following step S3305, it is determined whether or not the bet end command has been received. Since the 1-bet game is not set in this embodiment and the number of bets in the previous game is 2 or 3, a negative determination is always made in step S3305.

In step S3306, it is determined whether or not the re-game bet command has been received. As described above, the re-game bet command is a command output when the next bet is made after making one bet in the re-game setting process (FIG. 58), and after making one bet. , Is output after about 0.2 sec. Upon receiving the re-game bet command, an affirmative determination is made in step S3306, and the process proceeds to step S3307. In step S3307, the process of turning on the second bet display unit 34b is executed, and in step S3308, the bet sound effect is controlled to be output from the speaker 64.

In the following step S3309, it is determined whether or not the bet end command has been received, and if not, it waits until the re-game bet command is received in step S3310. When the re-game bet command is received, the process of turning on the third bet display unit 34c is executed in step S3311, and the bet sound effect is controlled to be output from the speaker 64 in step S3312. After that, the normal re-game bet effect setting process is terminated. If it is determined in step S3305 or step S3309 that the bet end command has been received, the normal re-game bet effect setting process is terminated as it is.

<Specific replay bet production setting process>
Next, the specific replay bet effect setting process in step S3203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the specific re-game bet effect setting process, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where no bet is actually made (re-game state), a process of performing an effect as if a bet was made is executed. do. In the following description, the effect as if the bet was made is also referred to as a pseudo bet effect.

First, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the bet end command has been received. As described above, in the re-game setting process (FIG. 58) based on the specific re-game result winning, even when a plurality of virtual medals are automatically inserted, the virtual medals are automatically inserted at one time. Basically, the bet end command is output immediately after the winning of the specific replay result is established. In step S3401, it waits until the bet end command is received. Upon receiving the bet end command, an affirmative determination is made in step S3401 and the process proceeds to step S3402.

In step S3402, it is determined whether or not the extinguished flag is set. If the extinguished flag is set and the pseudo bet effect has already been performed, the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated as it is. In this case, the pseudo bet effect after step S3403 is not performed. If it is determined in step S3402 that the extinguished flag is not set, the process of turning on the first credit lamp 56b is executed in step S3403. That is, in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result winning, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on and the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is urged. The first credit lamp 56b may be set to blink.

In the following step S3404, it is determined whether or not any of the specific input command, the specific first operation command, and the specific second operation command has been received. A bet number operation such as inserting a medal from the medal insertion slot 45 or operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result winning by receiving any command. If is performed, the process proceeds to step S3405, and the process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed.

In the following step S3406, a process of turning off all the bet display units 34a to 34c is executed, and in step S3406, a process of setting a turned-off flag is executed. Then, in step S3408, the process of turning on the first bet display unit 34a is executed, and in step S3409, the bet sound effect is controlled to be output from the speaker 64.

In the following step S3410, it is grasped whether or not the number of bets in the previous game, that is, the number of bets at the time of winning the replay result is 1. The number of bets in the previous game is stored in step S2211 in the effect setting process at the time of total stop (FIG. 53). It should be noted that the number of bets set in the re-game setting process may be grasped based on the bet end command received in step S3401 as described above. Incidentally, since the one-bet game is not executed in this embodiment, a negative determination is always made in step S3410.

If the number of bets in the previous game is not 1, the process proceeds to step S3411 and the process of inputting 67 to the bet timers provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The bet timer is for defining the interval between one bet and the next bet when performing a pseudo bet effect. The bet timer is decremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle), and the bet timer input in step S3411 becomes 0 after about 0.1 sec. That is, the interval between one bet and the next bet in the pseudo bet effect is longer than the interval between the one bet and the next bet in the replay bet effect, and the interval between the one bet and the next bet in the continuous bet effect is longer. It is set to be the same length as the interval.

In step S3412, it is determined whether or not the bet timer input in step S3411 has become 0, that is, whether or not about 0.1 sec has elapsed since the first bet display unit 34a was turned on. If it has passed, the process proceeds to step S3413. In step S3413, a process of turning on the second bet display unit 34b is executed, and in step S3414, the bet sound effect is controlled to be output from the speaker 64. Then, in step S3415, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the previous game was 2.

If the number of bets in the previous game is 3 instead of 2, the process of inputting 67 (about 0.1 sec) to the bet timer is executed in step S3416 until the bet timer becomes 0 in step S3417. stand by. When about 0.1 sec has elapsed since the second bet display unit 34b was turned on, the process proceeds to step S3418, the process of turning the third bet display unit 34c into the lighting state is executed, and the bet sound effect is produced in step S3419. After controlling the output from the speaker 64, the specific replay bet effect setting process ends. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3410 or step S3415, the specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated as it is without performing the subsequent processes.

In other words, in the pseudo-bet effect based on the specific replay result winning, the production mode of the bet process effect up to the bet-compatible effect is basically the same as the effect mode of the bet process effect up to the bet-compatible effect in the continuous bet effect. Is set to have the same effect mode. Specifically, in any case, in the betting process effect when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the bet display units 34a to 34c are sequentially turned on at intervals of about 0.1 sec, and the lighting state is set. The bet sound effect is also common. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as other small role results and out-of-game results, and it gives a sense of discomfort by composing the specific role with the replay result. It can be made difficult.

In addition, in the re-game bet production based on the normal re-game result winning, the production mode of the betting process production up to the bet-compatible production is in the betting process production and the continuous betting production in the pseudo-bet production based on the specific re-game result winning. It is set to be different from the effect mode of the bet process effect. Specifically, in the betting process effect when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, in the normal replay bet effect, the bet display units 34a to 34c are sequentially lit at intervals of about 0.2 sec. On the other hand, in the pseudo bet effect and the continuous bet effect, the interval is about 0.1 sec as described above. From this point as well, it is easy to give the impression that the specific re-game result is treated in the same way as other small-role results and out-of-game results, not the normal re-game result.

Further, as already described, when the AT mode is started, the second re-game result prize and the third re-game result prize are established among the specific re-game results. In this case, when the second re-game result winning or the third re-gaming result winning is established and the AT mode is to be started, the betting number operation is performed rather than the start operation without going through the betting number operation. It is possible to play the AT mode to be started with a new feeling by prompting the start operation through the above. In other words, if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, it gives a strong impression that the result of the previous game is inherited, so it tends to be a mismatch with the intention to play with a new feeling. From this point as well, it is possible to encourage the bet number operation at the start of the AT mode to help improve the interest of the AT mode. Further, for example, when the advantage (number of games, additional performance, etc.) in the AT mode to be started is notified at the start of the AT mode, it is better to notify the advantage in the bet number operation than in the start operation. It is possible to perform the start operation (operation that triggers the lottery process) after knowing the advantage. Then, if the configuration is such that the bet number operation is promoted after the specific re-game result winning is established at the start of the AT mode, the advantage of the AT mode is based on the bet number operation at the start of the AT mode as described above. It becomes possible to easily add a configuration for notifying such things, and this point also helps to improve the interest. In this case, for example, the AT mode type (first AT mode or second AT mode) may be notified based on the bet number operation of the start game (game after winning the specific replay result), or the initial number of games in the AT mode. May be configured to be determined by lottery, and then the initial number of games may be notified by the bet number operation of the starting game.

If it is determined in step S3404 that none of the specific input command, the specific first operation command, and the specific second operation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3420. In step S3420, the start operation command is received, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start lever 41 has been performed, and if the operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S3404.

That is, after the re-game result winning is established, the bet is set by the re-game setting process on the main control device 101 side without going through the bet number operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 or the like. It is possible to start the game by operating the start lever 41 without operating the bet number such as the credit insertion switch 56. Then, in the specific re-game bet effect setting process, a pseudo bet effect is performed based on the bet number operation, but when such a start operation is performed without the bet number operation, the pseudo bet effect is performed. The bet-corresponding effect in which the number of bets of the game to be started this time is notified is performed without performing the bet effect.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S3420 that the start operation command has been received, the process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed in step S3421. Then, in step S3422, it is determined whether or not the reels are in the wait period, and when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started immediately when the start operation command of this time is received instead of the wait period, the step. In S3423, a process of switching all the bet display units 34a to 34c to the off state is executed. Then, in step S3424, the process of setting the turned-off flag is executed, and in step S3425, the process of turning on the first bet display unit 34a is executed. In the following step S3426, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the previous game was 1, and if it is not 1, a process of turning on the second bet display unit 34b in step S3427 is executed. Then, in step S3428, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the previous game was 2, and if it is not 2, a process of turning on the third bet display unit 34c in step S3429 is executed. From, the present specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3426 or step S2428, the specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated as it is.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the re-gaming state is set based on the specific re-gaming result winning as described above, the first credit lamp 56b is set to the lit state and the pseudo-bet effect is performed based on the bet number operation. It is designed to give the impression that it is treated the same as other small role results and missed results. However, the fact that the re-gambling state is set based on the specific re-gambling result winning can be grasped from the stop roll, the re-gambling status display unit 76a, etc., and the re-gambling state is set. It is considered that there is a request that he does not want to bother to operate the bet number even though he knows. In this case, forcing the bet number operation is considered to cause a significant decrease in the playing motivation of the player who has the request, and in that respect, the start operation can be performed without going through the bet number operation as in the above configuration. By doing so, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of players.

Moreover, even though the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation as described above, if the pseudo bet effect is performed, the player may feel uncomfortable, and in particular, the bet is purposely performed. It is highly possible that the player's willingness to play will be reduced by performing an unnecessary pseudo-bet effect even though he / she has selected not to perform several operations. On the other hand, in order to ensure the transparency of the game, it is considered that the number of bets in this game should be notified.

Therefore, as described above, when the start operation is performed without the bet number operation in the re-game state set based on the specific re-game result winning, the bet process effect is performed in the pseudo-bet effect. Since the bet-corresponding effect is performed without any discomfort, it is possible to clearly notify the number of bets in this game while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Here, in the slot machine 10, even when the start operation is performed as described above, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started unless the wait period has elapsed, and the wait is concerned. The start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is waited until the period elapses. Further, also in the start-time effect setting process as described above, in the present embodiment, the start-time effect based on the start operation is waited until the wait period elapses. Then, if the start operation is performed during the wait period, the period until the wait period elapses becomes a mere waiting time, and the waiting time may reduce the attention to the game.

Therefore, in the specific replay bet effect setting process, if it is determined in step S3422 that the wait period is in progress, the pseudo bet permission flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S3430, and then the process proceeds to step S3406. The process for performing the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect is executed. In other words, during the wait period, even if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect is performed, so that the above waiting time is well compensated for by the effect. It becomes possible.

Further, in performing the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect during the wait period, after the first bet display unit 34a is turned on, until the bet timer becomes 0 in step S3412 and an affirmative determination is made. (Step S3412: NO), it is determined in step S3431 whether the above pseudo bet permission flag is set or whether a new start operation command has been received, and if either of them, the process proceeds to step S3432. In step S3432, it is determined whether or not the wait period has elapsed, and if not, the process returns to step S3412. Even if the pseudo bet permission flag is not set in step S3431 and a new start operation command is not received, the process returns to step S3412.

On the other hand, if the pseudo bet permission flag is set or a new start operation command is received and the wait period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3427, and the second bet display unit 34b and the third bet display unit 34c Is executed.

Further, after the second bet display unit 34b is turned on, the pseudo bet permission flag is set in step S3433 until the bet timer becomes 0 in step S3417 and affirmative determination is made (step S3417: NO). It is determined whether the command has been started or a new start operation command has been received, and if it is any of these, the process proceeds to step S3434, and it is determined whether or not the wait period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S3433 or if the wait period has not elapsed in step S3434, the process returns to step S3412. Then, in step S3434, if the pseudo bet permission flag is set or a new start operation command is received and the wait period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3429 and the third bet display unit 34c is lit. Execute the process to be in the state.

That is, if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, or if the start operation is performed during the bet process production, the bet process production is interrupted as the wait period elapses, and the bet correspondence production is performed as it is. Was made to be done. By doing so, while expecting the effect of the pseudo-bet effect, the bet process effect can be produced even when the start operation is performed without the bet number operation or the start operation is performed during the bet process effect. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by doing this.

<Bet-compatible production setting process>
In the bet-corresponding effect setting process of step S3205, the same process as the process of steps S3423 to S3429 is executed. That is, after all the bet display units 34a to 34c are turned off, the bet display units 34a to 34c corresponding to the number of bets set in the replay state are turned on. In this case, even in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result winning, the re-game state is set without the bet number operation, instead of performing the bet-corresponding effect through the bet process effect based on the bet number operation. At that time, the bet-corresponding effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to suitably avoid the event that the AT winning notification effect executed based on the bet number operation overlaps with the bet process effect and the bet corresponding effect.

<BET display and bet display>
Next, the relationship between the BET display unit 75 on the main control device 101 side, the bet display unit 34 on the display control device 81 side, the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and the presence / absence of lighting is shown in FIGS. 69 and 70. The explanation will be given with reference to the timing chart. In addition, in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, each game is progressing in a 3-bet game, and basically, the description will be made on the premise that the credit counter is 3 or more.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the game which is one of the small winning combination results, when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at t1, the medal corresponding to the small winning combination result is paid out. When the payout of medals is completed at t2, the first credit lamp 56b is switched from the off state to the on state, and it is notified that the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 can be accepted. At the same timing, the acceptable status display unit 76c also switches from the off state to the on state (not shown). When the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed at t3, the BET display unit 75 and the bet display unit 34 are temporarily switched from the lit state to the extinguished state. Then, at t4, t5, and t6, the first BET display unit 75a and the first bet display unit 34a, the second BET display unit 75b and the second bet display unit 34b, the third BET display unit 75c, and the third bet display unit 34c are sequentially used. Is switched from the off state to the on state, and the bet sound effect is output at the timing of switching to each on state. It should be noted that the series of effects t3 to t6 correspond to the bet process effect in the normal bet effect, and the bet is in a state where the BET display units 75a to 75c and the bet display units 34a to 34c are lit at t6. Corresponds to the corresponding production. The interval between bets in the bet process effect in the normal bet effect is about 0.1 sec as described above.

When the bet is completed at t6, the startable state display unit 76b switches from the off state to the on state, and the start operation can be accepted. Then, after the wait period has elapsed at t7, when the start lever 41 is operated at t8 to perform the start operation, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started. The lottery process is executed based on the start operation of t8, and the lottery result is regarded as an out result.

When each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at t9, the result is disengagement as described above, and the medal is not paid out. In this case, at t9, the first credit lamp 56b is switched from the off state to the on state, and it is notified that the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 can be accepted. Even if the small winning combination result winning cannot be established when the small winning combination result is won, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the lighting state when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. By the way, if a freeze period for production is provided after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the lit state after the medal is paid out after the freeze period has elapsed. .. If the medals are not paid out, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the lit state after the freeze period has elapsed.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t10, the BET display units 75a to 75c and the bet display units 34a to 34c are turned off, and then the BET display units 75a to 75c and each are turned off at t11 to t13. The bet process effect in which the bet display units 34a to 34c are sequentially switched to the lit state is executed.

When the bet is completed at t13, the startable status display unit 76b is switched to the lit state, and when the start lever 41 is operated at t14, the lottery process based on the start operation is executed, but the t14 is still a wait. Since it is during the period, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started at t14. In this case, at t15 when the wait period elapses, the rotation processing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the start operation of t14 is executed. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation of t14 is usually a replay result.

It is assumed that the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started at t15, the wait period elapses at t16, and then the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at t17. In this case, the result of the lottery process performed at t14 as described above is the normal re-game result, and when the normal re-game result winning is established at t17, the re-game status display unit 76a is displayed by the re-game setting process. The off state is switched to the on state, and the virtual medal is automatically inserted. That is, at t17, the replay status display unit 76a is turned on, and at t17, the BET display unit 75 and the bet display unit 34 are temporarily switched from the lit state to the extinguished state, and then at t18, t19, and t20. , The first BET display unit 75a and the first bet display unit 34a, the second BET display unit 75b and the second bet display unit 34b, the third BET display unit 75c and the third bet display unit 34c are switched from the off state to the on state, respectively. , The bet sound effect is output at the timing of switching to each lighting state. It should be noted that the series of effects t17 to t20 correspond to the bet process effect in the replay bet effect, and the bet display units 75a to 75c and the bet display units 34a to 34c are lit at t20. Corresponds to bet-friendly production. The interval between bets in the bet process effect in the replay bet effect is about 0.2 sec as described above, which is a longer period than the interval between bets in the bet process effect in the normal bet effect. By the way, if a freeze period for production is provided after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, the replay status display unit 76a is turned on after the freeze period has elapsed, and the virtual medal is automatically inserted. Processing is done.

When the bet by the process for setting the re-game is completed at t20, the startable state display unit 76b is switched to the lit state. At the same timing, the acceptable status display unit 76c also switches from the off state to the on state (not shown). Then, when the start operation is performed at t21, the lottery process is executed and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation of t21 is usually a replay result.

When each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at t22, the lottery result of this game is a normal replay result as described above, and as in the case of t17, the replay status display unit 76a is performed at t22 to t25. The betting process effect in the re-game bet effect in which the BET display units 75a to 75c and the bet display units 34a to 34c are sequentially switched to the lit state is executed. In this case, although the wait period has not elapsed at t22, the normal bet effect is executed regardless of whether or not the wait period has elapsed, and the normal bet effect is performed in the same manner before and after the wait period has elapsed. Since it is configured, the betting process effect of t17 to t20 and the betting process effect of t22 to t25 are executed in the same manner.

Then, when the bet is completed at t25, the startable state display unit 76b is switched to the lit state, and then the wait period elapses at t26. When the start operation is performed at t27, the lottery process is executed and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation of t27 is also regarded as the normal replay result.

At t28, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and at t28 to t31, the replay status display unit 76a is lit, and the BET display units 75a to 75c and the bet display units 34a to 34c perform the betting process effect. Will be executed. Further, at t31, the startable state display unit 76b is switched to the lit state. Unlike the start operation of t27, the start operation of t32 is a start operation before the wait period elapses. In this case, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started at t32 where the start operation is performed, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started at t33 where the wait period elapses.

Next, the relationship between the operation of the BET display unit 75, the bet display unit 34, the first credit insertion switch 56, etc. and the presence / absence of lighting in the case of the specific replay result will be described.

As shown in FIG. 70, it is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t42, which is later than t41 at which the wait period elapses, in the game in which the specific replay result is won. In this case, the re-game status display unit 76a is turned on at t42, and the BET display units 75a to 75c are turned off. Immediately after that, at t43, the same number as the previous bet number is executed. Lighting processing of each BET display unit 75a to 75c is performed so as to be the number of bets. That is, in the specific replay result, the effect corresponding to the bet process effect by the BET display units 75a to 75c on the main control device 101 side is not executed, and the bet corresponding effect is performed. However, in the case of the specific replay result, the lighting process of the BET display units 75a to 75c on the main control device 101 side and the pseudo bet effect by the bet display units 34a to 34c on the display control device 81 side are not linked to t43. Even if the BET display units 75a to 75c are displayed corresponding to the number of bets in the current game, the bet display units 34a to 34c continue to produce bets corresponding to the previous number of bets.

Further, at t43, the BET display units 75a to 75c are turned on, and the first credit lamp 56b is also turned on, prompting the operation of the first credit input switch 56. Further, since the bet is completed at t43, the startable state display unit 76b is also turned on. In this case, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t44, a pseudo bet effect is performed by the bet display units 34a to 34c at t44 to t47. That is, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the extinguished state at t44, and then at t45, t46, and t47, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet are sequentially placed. The display unit 34c is switched from the off state to the lit state, and the bet sound effect is output at the timing of switching to each lit state. The series of effects t44 to t47 correspond to the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect, and the state in which the bet display units 34a to 34c are lit at t47 corresponds to the bet corresponding effect. The interval between bets in the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect is about 0.1 sec as described above, which is the same length as the interval between bets in the bet process effect in the normal bet effect, and is in the replay bet effect. The length is set shorter than the interval between each bet in the betting process effect.

After that, when the start operation is performed at t48, since the wait period has already passed, the lottery process is executed at the t48 and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started. .. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation of t48 is also regarded as the specific replay result.

When each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at t49, the lottery result of this game is a specific replay result as described above, and as in the case of t42, the replay status display unit 76a is performed at t49 to t50. , The process of turning on the startable state display unit 76b and the first credit lamp 56b, and the process of temporarily turning off the BET display units 75a to 75c and then switching to the lighting state are performed. Incidentally, with respect to the re-game status display unit 76a, since the game result of the previous game was also a prize for the re-game result, at t50, the re-game status display unit 76a continues to be lit. It should be noted that at t50, the light may be turned off once and then turned on again immediately afterwards.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t52 after the wait period has elapsed at t51, pseudo by the bet display units 34a to 34c at t52 to 55 as in the case of t44 to t47. Bet production is performed. That is, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the extinguished state at t52, and then at t53, t54, and t55, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet are sequentially placed. The display unit 34c is switched from the off state to the lit state, and the bet sound effect is output at the timing of switching to each lit state.

After that, when the start operation is performed at t56, since the wait period has already passed, the lottery process is executed at the t56 and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started. .. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation of t56 is also regarded as the specific replay result.

As described above, in the re-gaming state based on the specific re-game result winning, the pseudo bet effect based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is a bet on the effect, and the bet is already set in the re-game setting process. Completed. Therefore, it is also possible to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R by performing the start operation without going through the operation of the first credit input switch 56.

That is, at t57, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and at t57 to t58, the replay status display unit 76a, the startable status display unit 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b are turned on, and each BET. A process is performed in which the display units 75a to 75c are temporarily turned off and then switched to the on state. After the wait period has elapsed at t59, if the start operation is performed at t60 without operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the t60. .. In this case, the bet display units 34a to 34c are temporarily turned off at t60, and then the bet display units 34a to 34c are turned on at t61. The bet sound effect is not output at t61. That is, in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result winning, if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, the execution of the bet process effect is restricted and the bet-corresponding effect is immediately executed. .. By doing so, the player is given a sense of discomfort due to the fact that the betting process production has not been completed (being executed) even though the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started. Can be avoided.

It is assumed that the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the start operation of t60, and the lottery result based on the start operation is also the specific replay result. When each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops at t63 after the wait period elapses at t62, the replay status display unit 76a, the startable status display unit 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b are displayed at t63 to t64. The process of turning on the light and the process of switching the BET display units 75a to 75c to the lighted state after temporarily turning them off are performed.

After that, when the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed at t65, the pseudo bet effect is started as described above. That is, at t65, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the extinguished state, and then at t66, the first bet display unit 34a is switched to the lit state, and the bet sound effect is output.

Start at t67, which is before the period (about 0.1 sec) from when the first bet display unit 34a is turned on to when the next second bet display unit 34b is turned on is elapsed. When the start operation is performed by the lever 41, the wait period has already passed and the bet on the main control device 101 side has been completed. Therefore, at the t67, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R The rotation is started. In this case, the betting process effect in the pseudo-bet effect started at t66 is restricted in the middle by the start operation of t67, and is switched to the bet-compatible effect at t67. By doing so, the player is given a sense of discomfort due to the fact that the betting process production has not been completed (being executed) even though the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started. Can be avoided.

It is assumed that the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the start operation of t67, and the lottery result based on the start operation is also the specific replay result. When each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at t68, the process of turning on the replay status display unit 76a, the startable status display unit 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b at t68 to t69, and each BET display. A process is performed in which the units 75a to 75c are temporarily turned off and then switched to the lit state.

After that, when the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed at t70, the pseudo bet effect is started as described above because it is still before the wait period has elapsed. That is, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the extinguished state at t70, and then at t71, t72, and t74, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet are sequentially placed. The display unit 34c is switched from the off state to the lit state, and the bet sound effect is output at the timing of switching to each lit state.

Further, even if the start operation by the start lever 41 is performed at t73 during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, the t73 is still in the wait period, so that the above bet process effect is performed. Will continue. Then, at t75 when the wait period elapses, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started. In this way, even if the start operation is performed during the bet process effect of the pseudo bet effect, the bet process effect is continued if it is during the wait period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a period in which the production is not performed even though there is a waiting time such as a wait period.

However, even if the bet process effect is continued when the start operation is performed during the bet process effect before the elapse of the wait period, the wait period elapses before the bet process effect ends. In some cases. In this case, when the wait period has elapsed, the bet process effect is ended and the bet-compatible effect is switched to.

That is, it is assumed that the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the start operation of t75, and the lottery result based on the start operation is also the specific replay result. When each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at t76, the process of turning on the replay status display unit 76a, the startable status display unit 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b at t76 to t77, and each BET display. A process is performed in which the units 75a to 75c are temporarily turned off and then switched to the lit state.

After that, when the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed at t78, the pseudo bet effect is started as described above because it is still before the wait period has elapsed. That is, at t78, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the extinguished state, and then at t79 and t81, the first bet display unit 34a and the second bet display unit 34b are sequentially lit from the off state. The bet sound effect is output at the timing of switching to the state and switching to each lighting state. Further, even if the start operation by the start lever 41 is performed at t80 during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, the t80 is still in the wait period, so that the above bet process effect is performed. Will continue.

Then, after the second bet display unit 34b is switched to the lighting state at t81, before the period (about 0.1 sec) until the next third bet display unit 34c is turned on is elapsed. When the wait period elapses at a certain t82, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the t82. In this case, the betting process effect in the pseudo-bet effect started at t78 is limited in the middle by the start operation of t81 and the elapse of the wait period of t82, and is switched to the bet-compatible effect at t82.

<Standby state setting process>
Next, the standby state setting process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71. The standby state setting process is a process for setting the slot machine 10 to the standby state (demo state) when the game has not been performed for a predetermined period, and is a process in step S215 of the normal process (FIG. 18). This is the process to be performed.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not any of the game operations provided in the slot machine 10 has been performed based on the detection results of various sensors. Specifically, it corresponds to the operation of the operation units such as the start lever 41, the stop switches 42 to 44, the first credit input switch 56, the second credit input switch 57, and the clearing switch 59 connected to the main control device 101. In addition to cases where detection is performed by the detection sensors 41a, 42a to 44a, 56a, 57a, 59a, etc., medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 (medals are detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a), the front door 12 is opened, and the like. If this is done, a positive determination is made in step S3501.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501 and no game operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S3502, and it is determined whether or not any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating. When any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, it is determined in step S3503 whether or not the medal is being paid out. If the medals have not been paid out, it is determined in step S3503 whether or not the re-game state is set. As described above, the re-game state is a state set in the re-game setting process based on any of the re-game result winnings. If it is not in the replay state, the process proceeds to step S3504, and a process of setting a permission flag for permitting counting of standby counters provided in various counter areas 106e in various flag storage areas 106d is executed. The standby counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the timing to be set in the standby state.

If it is determined in step S3501 that any of the game operations has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3505 and the process of clearing the standby counter to the initial value (120800) is executed. After executing the process of step S3505, or when an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S3502 to S3503, a process of clearing the above permission flag is executed in step S3506. In this case, in the timer subtraction process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the standby counter is decremented one by one on condition that the above permission flag is set, and the permission flag is set. If not, the process of subtracting the standby counter is not performed. Since the timer interrupt process is started in a cycle of 1.49 msec, it takes about 3 minutes for the standby counter to become 0 from the initial value.

After executing the process of step S3504 or step S3506, it is determined in step S3507 whether or not any of the game operations has been performed. Such a process is the same process as the process of step S3501. Then, when a negative determination is made in step S3507 and it is determined that no game operation has been performed, the above-mentioned standby counter becomes 0 in step S3508, and a predetermined period (about 3 min) until the standby state is set. Determines whether or not has passed. If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed, the standby state setting process is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed, the process of setting the slot machine 10 to the standby state is executed in steps S3509 to S3514. That is, in step S3509, the process of setting the standby transition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The standby transition command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to understand that the standby state is to be set.

In the following step S3510, for a front light that illuminates each reel 32L, 32M, 32R from the outside, a backlight that irradiates each reel 32L, 32M, 32R from the inside, and a game panel 25 provided inside the game panel 25. The processing of storing the lighting / extinguishing state of the backlight in the standby storage area 106c of the RAM 106 is executed, and the processing of turning off each of these lights to put them in the standby state is executed. If the front light or backlight is already off, that state is maintained.

In the following step S3511, the information displayed by the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is stored in the standby storage area 106c, and each segment of each of these display units 60 to 62 is stored. Is set to OFF and the process of setting the standby state to the standby state is executed. Further, in step S3512, the information displayed on the instruction monitor 68 is stored in the standby storage area 106c of the RAM 106, and a process of turning off each segment of the instruction monitor 68 to put it in the standby state is executed.

In the following step S3513, the process of storing the information displayed on the BET display unit 75 in the standby storage area 106c is executed, and the BET display units 75a to 75c of the BET display unit 75 are set to the standby state. Execute the process to be performed.

Then, in step S3514, when the startable state display unit 76b of the game state display unit 76 is in the lighting state, the lighting information can be stored in the standby storage area 106c and then started. After executing the process of turning off the status display unit 76b, the standby state setting process ends.

In this way, in a situation where each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, payout is not performed, and the game is not in the re-game state, the period during which no game operation is performed is a predetermined period or longer. As a result, the slot machine 10 is set to the standby state. In the standby state, various display units and the like are turned off, so that it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the slot machine 10. In this case, since the standby counter is not measured in the re-game state as described above, the standby state is not set even if the game operation or the like is not performed. Further, even in the standby state, when the standby state is set at least in a situation where the bet number operation is possible, the acceptable state display unit 76c is maintained in the lit state, so that the power supply is in the standby state. It is possible for the player to clearly distinguish between the state in which is not input and the state in which is not input.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3507 that any of the game operations has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3515, and it is determined whether or not the current state is set to the standby state. If it is not set to the standby state, the main standby state setting process is terminated as it is. When the standby state is set, the return process for returning from the standby state to the normal state is executed in steps S3516 to S3521.

That is, in step S3516, a process of setting the standby / return command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The standby return command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the standby state is restored to the normal state.

In the following step S3517, various front light and backlight return processes are executed. In the return processing, the state of the various front lights and backlights before the transition to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and a process of returning to that state (lighting state or extinguishing state) is performed.

In the following step S3518, the state before the transition to the standby state of the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and the state (lighting state or off state) is restored. Perform the process of making it. Further, in step S3519, the state before the transition to the standby state of the instruction monitor 68 is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and a process of returning to that state (lighting state or extinguishing state) is performed.

In the following step S3520, the state before the transition to the standby state of the BET display unit 75 is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and a process of returning to that state (lighting state or extinguishing state) is performed.

Then, in step S3521, among the game state display units 76, the state of the startable state display unit 76b before the transition to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and the state (lighted state or extinguished state) is restored. After performing the processing, the main standby state setting processing is terminated.

<Waiting process>
Next, the standby process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 72. The standby process corresponds to the standby state setting process on the main control device 101 side, and is a process performed as one of the other processes (step S2011) in the effect setting process (FIG. 51). Therefore, the process for shifting to the standby state or returning to the normal state, or the process for shifting to the temporary standby state before the transition to the standby state is performed.

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned standby transition command has been received. When the standby transition command is received, the standby process for setting the auxiliary display unit 65 to the standby mode is executed in step S3602. Specifically, the content currently displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is stored in the standby storage area 183c of the RAM 183, and the brightness of the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is lower than the normal brightness for the standby mode. In addition to setting the brightness of, for example, characters such as "demo state" are displayed. In the following step S3603, a process of setting the output volume from the speaker 64 to a volume for the standby mode smaller (or not output) than the volume at the normal time is executed.

In the following step S3604, the waiting process of the bet display unit 34 is executed. Specifically, at present, the content displayed by the bet display unit 34 is stored in the standby storage area 183c of the RAM 183, and the bet display units 34a to 34c of the bet display unit 34 are turned off. Run. In the following step S3605, the standby process of the first credit lamp 56b is executed. Specifically, the lighting / extinguishing state of the first credit lamp 56b is grasped, the contents are stored in the standby storage area 183c, and the process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed. When the first credit lamp 56b is already turned off, the turned off state is maintained only by storing the information.

If a negative determination is made in step S3601, it is determined in step S3606 whether or not the above-mentioned standby / return command has been received. When the standby / return command is received, the return process for setting the auxiliary display unit 65, which is in the standby mode in step S3607, to the normal state is executed. Specifically, the content displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 before the transition to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 183c so that the content is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and displayed. Performs processing to return the screen brightness to the normal brightness. Further, in step S3608, a process of setting the output volume from the speaker 64 to the output volume at the normal time is executed.

In the following step S3609, the return processing of the bet display unit 34 is executed. Specifically, a process of grasping the display content of the bet display unit 34 before the transition to the standby state from the standby storage area 183c and displaying the content on the bet display unit 34 is executed. Further, in step S3610, the process for returning the first credit lamp 56b is executed. Specifically, the standby storage area 183c is grasped as to whether or not the first credit lamp 56b was in the lighting state before the transition to the standby state, and if it is in the lighting state, the first credit lamp 56b is set to the lighting state. If the light is off before the transition to the standby state, the process of maintaining that state is executed.

After executing the process of step S3605 or step S3610, or when a negative determination is made in step S3606, the process proceeds to step S3611. The processes of steps S361 to S3622 are processes for a temporary standby state prior to the standby state.

Specifically, it is determined in step S3611 whether or not one game has ended. If the medal is paid out at the end of the game, it is determined whether or not the payout is completed. When the game ends with an affirmative determination in step S3611, the process proceeds to step S3612 and sets the permission flag for permitting the counting of the display continuation counters provided in the various counter areas 183b in the various flag storage areas 183a. To execute. The display continuation counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing to be set in the temporary standby state. The display continuation counter has an initial value (15000), and it takes 30 seconds from the processing of step S3612 until the display continuation counter becomes 0.

If it is determined in step S3611 that the game has not ended, or after the process of step S3612 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3613, and it is determined whether or not any of the game operations has been performed. In this case, the detection sensor corresponding to the operation of the operation unit such as the start lever 41, the stop switches 42 to 44, the first credit input switch 56, the second credit input switch 57, and the clearing switch 59 connected to the main control device 101. Commands output when detected by 41a, 42a to 44a, 56a, 57a, 59a, etc., medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 45 (medal insertion by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a), opening of the front door 12, etc. In addition to the case where the command output when the above is performed is received, the affirmative determination is also made in step S3613 when the effect switch 66 connected to the display control device 81 is operated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3613 and no game operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S3614 to determine whether or not the display continuation counter has become 0. If the display continuation counter is not 0, the standby process is terminated as it is. In this case, in the other processing (step S2011) in the effect setting processing (FIG. 51), the display continuation counter is subtracted by 1 on condition that the above permission flag is set, and the permission flag is set. If not, the process of subtracting the display continuation counter is not performed. Since the effect setting process is started in a cycle of 2 msec, it takes about 30 sec from the initial value to 0 of the display continuation counter.

When the display continuation counter becomes 0 in step S3614 and the period until the temporary standby state is set has elapsed, it is determined in step S3615 whether or not the game is in the replay state. In the re-game state, if the game operation is not performed for 30 seconds as the first transition period until the transition to the temporary standby state after winning any of the re-game results, the first step is in step S3616. After executing the temporary standby process of the credit lamp 56b, the main standby process is terminated. Specifically, in step S3616, the lighting / extinguishing state of the first credit lamp 56b is grasped, the contents are stored in the standby storage area 183c, and the process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed. .. When the first credit lamp 56b is already turned off, the turned off state is maintained only by storing the information.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3515 that the game is not in the replay state, the temporary standby process of the bet display unit 34 is executed in step S3517, and then the main standby process is terminated. Specifically, regarding step S3517, the contents currently displayed by the bet display unit 34 are stored in the standby storage area 183c of the RAM 183, and the bet display units 34a to 34c of the bet display unit 34 are turned off. Is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3614 and it is determined that any of the game operations has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3618. In step S3618, a process of clearing the display continuation counter to the initial value (15000) is executed. Then, in step S3619, the process of clearing the above permission flag is executed, and the measurement of the display continuation counter is terminated.

In the following step S3620, it is determined whether or not the temporary standby state is currently set, and if the temporary standby state is not set, the main standby process is terminated as it is. In the temporary standby state, in steps S3621 and S3622, the bet display unit 34 and the first credit lamp 56b are restored, and then the standby process is terminated. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S3609 and step S3610.

That is, in the display control device 81, a temporary standby state is set in addition to the normal state and the standby state as the state for the effect. The standby state corresponds to the standby state managed by the main control device 101, and the transition occurs when about 3 minutes have elapsed after the game operation is stopped. The temporary standby state is a state in which the display control device 81 manages the game, and the game shifts to about 30 seconds after the game is finished without the game operation being performed.

In this case, if no game operation is performed after the game is completed, the game shifts to the temporary standby state after about 30 seconds, and shifts to the standby state after about 3 minutes. When shifting to the temporary standby state, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off if it is in the re-gaming state, and the bet display unit 34 is turned off if it is not in the re-gaming state. Then, when shifting to the standby state, not only the bet display unit 34 and the first credit lamp 56b, but also the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are set to the standby mode. If any game operation is performed after the game is finished, the game shifts to the standby state about 3 minutes after the game operation is performed without going through the temporary standby state. That is, after about 3 minutes, the bet display unit 34 and the first credit lamp 56b are turned off, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are also set to the standby mode. However, it is not set to the standby state in the replay state.

<Temporary standby state and standby state>
The state of being set to the temporary standby state or the standby state after the game will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 73. Note that FIG. 73 (a) shows the state after the normal re-game result, FIG. 73 (b) shows the state after the small winning combination result, and FIG. 73 (c) shows the state after the specific re-game result. Is shown.

As shown in FIG. 73 (a), when the lottery result of the game started in ta1 is the normal re-game result, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in ta2, the normal re-game result winning is won. It is set to the replay state based on. In this case, the BET display unit 75 and the bet display unit 34 are temporarily turned off at ta2, and then are turned on again corresponding to the same number of bets as the number of bets on ta1. In this figure, the betting process effect is omitted. Further, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off at the start of ta1 (betting number operation), and the turned off state is maintained in the replay state.

As described above, in the replay state, when the temporary standby state is set, the temporary standby process of the first credit lamp 56b is performed, while the temporary standby process of the bet display unit 34 is not performed. Further, in the replay state, the standby state is not set.

In the re-game state based on the normal re-game result, the bet display unit 34 is turned on by performing the bet-corresponding effect, but the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. Therefore, when the first transition period (TA) from ta2 to the temporary standby state elapses, the bet display unit 34 is maintained in the lit state and the first credit lamp 56b is maintained in the off state. To.

Even if the second transition period (TB) from ta2 to the standby state elapses, the ta4 is not set to the standby state because it is in the re-gaming state. Therefore, in ta4, the bet display unit 34 is maintained in the lit state, and the first credit lamp 56b is maintained in the lit state. Further, the lighting state of the BET display unit 75 is maintained, and the auxiliary display unit 65 does not shift to the standby mode either.

As shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the lottery result of the game started at ta11 is one of the small winning combination results, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at tb2, the small winning combination result is won. Can hold. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on at ta12.

As described above, when the temporary standby state is set except for the replay state, the temporary standby process of the first credit lamp 56b is not performed, while the temporary standby process of the bet display unit 34 is performed. In addition, the standby state is set except for the replay state.

If no game operation is performed until ta13, when the first transition period (TA) from ta12 to transition to the temporary standby state elapses, the temporary standby state is set in the ta13. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b is maintained in the lit state, but the bet display unit 34 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state.

If no game operation is performed until ta14, when the second transition period (TB) from ta12 to transition to the standby state elapses, the standby state is set at ta14. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off, the BET display unit 75 is also turned off, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is also set to the standby mode.

If the lottery result of the game started at ta15 is also any small winning result, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at ta16, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on at ta16.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at ta17, which is the period from ta16 until the first transition period (TA) from ta16 to the temporary standby state elapses to ta18, the corresponding bet is placed. This is done, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. Further, although it is in the re-gambling state, the provisional standby state is not set by the bet number operation of ta17, and even if the ta18 is reached, the bet display unit 34 maintains the lighting state corresponding to the bet number operation of ta17. To. If no game operation is performed until ta19, when the second transition period (TB) from the bet number operation of ta17 to the transition to the standby state elapses, the standby state is set at the ta19. In this case, not only the first credit lamp 56b that has already been turned off, but also the bet display unit 34 and the BET display unit 75 are turned off, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is also set to the standby mode.

As shown in FIG. 73 (c), when the lottery result of the game started at ta21 is the specific re-game result, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at ta22, the specific re-game result winning is won. It is set to the replay state based on. In this case, the BET display unit 75 is turned off once at ta22, and then turned on again corresponding to the same number of bets as the number of bets on ta21. As described above, in ta22, the pseudo-bet effect of the bet display unit 34 is not performed, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned on.

As described above, in the replay state, when the temporary standby state is set, the temporary standby process of the first credit lamp 56b is performed, while the temporary standby process of the bet display unit 34 is not performed. Further, in the replay state, the standby state is not set.

Therefore, in ta23 where the first transition period (TA) from ta22 to the temporary standby state elapses, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the off state, while the bet display unit 34 is maintained in the lit state. To. Then, in ta24 where the second transition period (TB) from ta22 to transition to the standby state elapses, the standby state is not set. Therefore, the lighting state of the bet display unit 34 is maintained. Further, the lighting state of the BET display unit 75 is maintained, and the auxiliary display unit 65 does not shift to the standby mode either.

If the lottery result of the game started at ta25 is also a specific replay result, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at ta22, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on at ta26.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at ta27, which is the period from ta26 until the first transition period (TA) from ta26 to the temporary standby state elapses to ta28, a pseudo bet effect is produced. This is done, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. In this case, even if the ta28 is set, the temporary standby state is not set by the bet number operation of the ta27, and the bet display unit 34 maintains the bet-corresponding effect of the pseudo-bet effect corresponding to the bet number operation of the ta27.

Then, since the state does not shift to the standby state in the re-game state, when no game operation is performed until ta29, when the second transition period (TB) from the bet number operation of ta27 to the standby state elapses. Even so, the lighting state of the bet display unit 34 is maintained at ta29, the lighting state of the BET display unit 75 is also maintained, and the auxiliary display unit 65 does not shift to the standby mode.

That is, in the specific replay result, the small winning combination result, and the disengagement result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. Although the bet effect (normal bet effect and pseudo bet effect) by the bet display unit 34 in the case of the above is common, whether or not it is set to the temporary standby state or the standby state is different, and after the small winning combination result or the off result. Is set to the temporary standby state if the game operation is not performed during the first transition period, and the bet display unit 34 is turned off while the lighting state of the first credit lamp 56b is maintained. Then, after the specific re-game result, if the game operation is not performed during the first transition period, the temporary standby state is set, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned off, but the bet display unit 34 The lighting state of is maintained. That is, by not performing the game operation during the first transition period, it is possible to determine whether the result is a specific re-game result, a small winning combination result, or the like, depending on whether or not the first credit lamp 56b and the bet display unit 34 are turned off. It is possible.

In this case, if the game operation is performed before the first transition period elapses, the first transition period elapses after the game operation regardless of whether the specific re-game result or the small winning combination result is followed. Is not set to the temporary standby state, and it is possible to determine whether the result is a specific re-game result or a small winning combination result depending on whether or not the standby state is set when the second transition period elapses from the game operation. .. That is, if it is attempted to determine which result was obtained from the presence or absence of the first credit lamp 56b and the bet display unit 34 being turned off, it is necessary to interrupt the game for at least the first transition period. It is possible to realize a novel game property such that the result is discriminated by not performing the game operation.

In the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the re-game state set based on the specific re-game result winning, when the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated or the bet number operation such as the medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 45 is performed, the bet number operation is performed. A pseudo-bet effect is performed in which a bet-compatible effect is performed after a bet process effect. By doing so, even in the re-game state, the flow of a series of game operations of the slot machine 10 such as performing the start operation through the bet number operation and performing the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not changed. , Can be played. In addition, by doing the above, it is possible to give the impression that it is treated the same as a small winning combination result or a missed result, and a normal replay in which a bet-corresponding effect is performed through a bet process effect without going through a bet number operation. From the difference from the result, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that some kind of privilege can be obtained even if it is a replay result. Therefore, it can be used to improve the interest of the game.

In the re-game bet effect based on the normal re-game result prize, the bet process effect in which bets are made at 0.2 sec intervals is executed and then the bet-compatible effect is switched. The bet process effect in which bets are made at intervals of 0.1 sec is executed, and then the bet corresponding effect is switched to, and the notification mode of the bet effect based on the winning of both replay results is different. By doing so, the player is given the impression that the specific re-game result and the normal re-game result are clearly different not only from the mode of the operation for the progress of the game but also from the mode of notifying the bet effect. It becomes possible.

In the re-game state based on the specific re-game result winning, the bet itself has already been completed by the re-game setting process, and the startable state display unit 76b is in the lit state. Therefore, if the start operation is performed during the bet process effect based on the bet number operation, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be started even during the bet process effect. Therefore, if the start operation is performed during the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect after the bet number operation is performed, the bet process effect is interrupted as a restriction process of the bet process effect, and the bet is dealt with at that point. I switched to directing. By doing so, even though the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started based on the start operation, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort due to the fact that the bet-corresponding effect is not performed. It is possible to prevent the increase in processing load and confusion of the player due to the overlap between the effect and process at the start of rotation and the bet process effect and the process for it.

However, even if the start operation is during the bet process effect, if the start operation is during the wait period, the bet process effect is not interrupted and is executed as it is. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the betting process effect is interrupted until the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started.

If the start operation is performed during the betting process effect and the bet process effect is continued without interruption because it is before the lapse of the wait period, and the wait period elapses after the fact, the wait period is concerned. When the time has passed, the betting process production is interrupted and switched to the betting-compatible production. By doing so, even though the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the betting process production is not completed, and the inconvenience due to the duplication of production and processing is not caused. It becomes possible to do.

Further, even in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result winning, the start operation can be performed without the bet number operation. Therefore, when the start operation is performed without the bet number operation. Has made it possible to perform a bet-corresponding effect based on a bet number operation without executing a bet process effect in a pseudo-bet effect. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the increase in the processing load due to unnecessary production, and even though the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the start operation, the bet correspondence notification It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the is not performed.

Here, the specific re-game result is defined as a re-game result other than the first re-game result, but is defined as a first re-game result as a normal re-game result, for example, normal rip A to normal rip C. A game result that is won in duplicate with the second re-game result and the third re-game result as the specific re-game result is also set. In this case, in the above embodiment, which of the first re-game result and the second and third re-game results is awarded is defined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 (FIG. 39). In normal times, it is basically set so that the first re-game result prize as a normal re-game result is easily established, and the second re-game result prize or the second as a specific re-game result is set when the AT mode is started. 3 It is set so that it is easy to win a prize as a result of replay. That is, it is set so that the re-game bet effect may be performed or the pseudo-bet effect may be performed depending on the situation when the normal rips A to C are won. In this way, even in the re-game state, the effect of intentionally performing the bet number operation in the re-game state by clearly using the scene where the bet number operation is unnecessary and the scene where the bet number operation is desired to be performed is clearly used. Can be expected to be suitable.

In particular, in the case where the normal rips A to C are won, the AT mode is started in the scene where the second re-game result or the third re-game result as a specific re-game result is won and a pseudo bet effect is performed. When a new AT mode is started, a series of game operations such as performing a start operation via a bet number operation is performed, so that a new feeling is not dragged to the previous game. It is also possible to help switch to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the AT mode.

Further, in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result, the first credit lamp 56 is turned on and turned off after the first transition period elapses. On the other hand, after the small winning combination result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on, but the lighting state is maintained even after the first transition period elapses. By doing so, the first credit lamp 56 is turned on, or a pseudo bet effect is performed based on the bet number operation, giving the impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as the small winning combination result. However, if both results are to be discriminated, it is possible to realize a novel playability such as waiting until the first transition period elapses. In addition, it is possible to notify the player who ends the game even though the specific re-game result winning has been established, by turning off the first credit lamp 56b. After the first transition period has elapsed, it becomes difficult for the succeeding player to detect that the specific re-game result winning has been established, and it is possible to contribute to the fairness of the game.

Moreover, regardless of the result of the specific replay game or the small winning combination result, when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the extinguished state. Then, if both results are to be discriminated by the lapse of the first transition period, it becomes necessary not to operate the first credit insertion switch 56, and the result can be discriminated by waiting, especially in the playability. The 1-credit input switch 56 can be made into a game that requires a stricter wait, such as not being operated, and the interest of such a game can be suitably improved. That is, the temporary standby state is not set regardless of which game operation is performed, but when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, not only the determination in the temporary standby state but also the determination in the standby state is performed. You will not be able to do it. It should be noted that operating the first credit input switch 56 can be interpreted as an indication of the intention to continue the game, and in such a case, there is no disadvantage to the player even if the specific re-game result winning is not known. It is thought that it is unlikely to occur.

When the first transition period elapses, the bet display unit 34 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state if it is a specific replay result, while the lit state is maintained if it is a small winning combination result. After the small winning combination result, when the second transition period elapses, the bet display unit 34 is set to the standby state and the bet display unit 34 is turned off, but in the replay state, it is not set to the standby state even after the second transition period elapses. .. Therefore, although the bet display unit 34 is turned off after the small winning combination result, the bet display unit 34 is maintained in the lit state when the game is terminated while the specific re-game result winning is established. .. In this way, by confirming the bet display unit 34, it is possible to clearly determine that the bet display unit 34 has been won, which is inconvenient because the manager of the game hall or the like closes the store in that state. Can be suitably avoided.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, regarding another aspect when the start operation is performed during the bet process effect, the relationship between the lighting effect in which the bet display units 34a to 34c are sequentially lit in the bet process effect and the bet sound effect. An example of the modification in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77.

FIG. 74 (a) shows the betting process effect of the above embodiment.

When the bet number operation is performed at tb1, the bet process effect in which the bet time sound effect is output is executed together with the lighting effect in which the bet display units 34a to 34c are sequentially lit. When the betting process effect is completed at tb2, it becomes a bet-compatible effect. After that, when the start operation is performed at tb3, the lottery process is performed and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started. When the result of the lottery process is a specific re-game result, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at tb4 and the specific re-game result winning is established, the bet is set in the re-game setting process. Will be.

When the bet number operation is performed by the first credit insertion switch 56 or the like at tb6, which is later than tb5 where the wait period elapses, the bet display units 34a to 34c are accompanied by a bet time sound effect as in the case of tb1. The betting process production in which the lighting effect of is performed is started. However, such a bet process effect is a bet process effect in a pseudo bet effect.

When the start operation is performed at tb7, which is before tb8 where the bet process effect started at tb6 is completed, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and in this case, the bet process effect is started. Is switched to the bet-corresponding effect at tb7 (corresponding bet display units 34a to 34c are lit). That is, in the above embodiment, when the start operation is performed in the middle of the bet process effect in the pseudo-bet effect, both the lighting effect and the sound effect effect in the bet process effect are interrupted in the middle and switched to the bet-compatible effect. It is configured so that restrictions are applied.

FIG. 75 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process. In this modified example, when the start operation is performed in the middle of the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect, a part of the effect in the bet process effect is performed. Execution is restricted.

In the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modification, the process when the start operation is performed in the middle of the bet process effect is different from the process of FIG. 68. In this modification, the processes of step S3714, step S3720, step S3735, and step S3738 are added, and the other processes are the same as the corresponding processes of FIG. 68.

That is, in the situation of waiting until the second bet display unit 34b is turned on, it is determined in step S3733 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has elapsed in step S3734. If it is determined that the bet timer is set, the process of setting the restriction flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S3735, and then the process returns to step S3712 to wait until the bet timer becomes 0. When the bet timer becomes 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, and the second bet display unit 34b is turned on in step S3713. Then, it is determined in step S3714 whether or not the above restriction flag is set, and if it is not set, the process of outputting the bet sound effect is executed in step S3715, and then the first step S3716. Proceed to the process of turning on the 3-bet display unit 34c. On the other hand, when the restriction flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3716 without outputting the bet sound effect.

Further, in the situation of waiting until the third bet display unit 34c is turned on, it is determined in step S3736 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has elapsed in step S3737. If it is determined that the bet timer is set, the process of setting the restriction flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S3738, and then the process returns to step S3718 to wait until the bet timer becomes 0. When the bet timer becomes 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S3718, and the third bet display unit 34c is turned on in step S3719. Then, in step S3720, it is determined whether or not the above restriction flag is set, and if it is not set, a process of outputting a bet sound effect is executed in step S3721, and then a specific replay bet is made. End the effect setting process. On the other hand, when the restriction flag is set, the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated without outputting the bet sound effect.

FIG. 74B shows how the execution of a part of the effect in the bet process effect is restricted when the start operation is performed in the middle of the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect.

tb11 to tb16 are the same as the above tb1 to tb6, and bets are placed in the re-game setting process accompanying the winning of the specific re-game result, and after the wait period has elapsed, the bet number operation is performed on tb16. do. In this case, the betting process effect as a pseudo bet effect is started from tb16. When the start operation is performed at tb17, which is before the bet process effect is completed, the bet display units 34a to 34c are continuously lit, but the bet sound effect is output accordingly. Is restricted. As a result, in the betting process effect started at tb16, the lighting effect is executed from tb16 to tb18, but the bet time sound effect is executed from tb16 to tb17, and is not executed from tb17 to tb18. Then, at tb18, it will be switched to the bet-compatible production. By doing so, it is possible to avoid duplication of at least the processing for outputting the bet sound effect with the processing for starting rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and at the time of betting. It is also possible to eliminate the overlap between the sound effect and the start sound effect at the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

For example, instead of a configuration in which lighting control of each bet display unit 34a to 34c is individually performed like the bet display unit 34, or in addition, a bet correspondence effect on the display control device 81 side is performed in a predetermined area of the auxiliary display unit 65. A configuration that does so is also conceivable. In such a configuration, when the bet number operation is performed, it is conceivable to set the display effect pattern until the bet process effect is completed when the bet process effect is started. Then, even if the bet number operation is performed in the middle of the betting process production, it is better to continue as it is rather than switching the display production pattern to the display production pattern of the bet correspondence production in the middle, which leads to a reduction in the processing load. it is conceivable that. Therefore, at least by limiting the sound effect effect side at the time of betting in the middle, while avoiding an increase in the processing load, there is an inconvenience due to duplication of sound effects at the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. It is possible to prevent it from occurring.

FIG. 76 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process. In this modified example, when the start operation is performed in the middle of the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect, the bet sound effect in the bet process effect. Will continue, but the continuation of the lighting effect will be restricted.

In the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modification, the processes of step S3813, step S3819, step S3832, step S3836 and step S3839 are added as compared with the process of FIG. 68, and the other processes are shown in FIG. It is the same as the corresponding process of 68.

That is, in the situation of waiting until the second bet display unit 34b is turned on, it is determined in step S3834 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has elapsed in step S3835. If it is determined to be the case, the process of setting the restriction flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S3836, and then the process proceeds to the process of switching to the bet-corresponding effect on the step S3829 side.

Further, in the situation of waiting until the third bet display unit 34c is turned on, it is determined in step S3738 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has elapsed in step S3838. If it is determined to be the case, the process of setting the restriction flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S3839, and then the process proceeds to the process of switching to the bet-corresponding effect on the step S3831 side.

In the process of switching to the bet-compatible effect, after executing the process of turning on the bet display units 34a to 34c corresponding to the number of bets, it is determined in step S3832 whether or not the above restriction flag is set, and the set is set. If not, the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated as it is. If the restriction flag is set, the process returns to step S3812 after switching to the bet-corresponding effect.

When the bet timer becomes 0 in step S3812, an affirmative determination is made in step S3812, and it is determined in step S3813 whether or not the above restriction flag is set. If it is not set, the second bet display unit 34b is turned on in step S3814, the process of outputting the bet sound effect is executed in step S3815, and then the third bet display unit 34c in step S3816 is displayed. Proceed to the process of turning on. When the restriction flag is set in step S3813, the process of outputting the bet sound effect is executed without executing the process of turning on the second bet display unit 34b, and then the third bet is executed. Proceed to the process of turning on the display unit 34c.

Then, when the bet timer becomes 0 in step S3818, an affirmative determination is made in step S3818, and it is determined in step S3819 whether or not the above restriction flag is set. If it is not set, the third bet display unit 34c is turned on in step S3820, the process of outputting the bet sound effect is executed in step S3821, and then the specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated. .. When the restriction flag is set in step S3819, the process of outputting the bet sound effect is executed without executing the process of turning on the third bet display unit 34c, and then the specific replay is performed. The bet effect setting process ends.

FIG. 74 (c) shows how the betting sound effect in the above-mentioned betting process effect continues, while the continuation of the lighting effect is restricted.

Similar to tb1 to tb6, it is assumed that a bet is placed on tb21 to tb25 in the process for setting the re-game accompanying the winning of the specific re-game result, and after the wait period has elapsed, the bet number operation is performed on tb26. .. In this case, the betting process effect as a pseudo bet effect is started from tb26. When the start operation is performed at tb27, which is before tb28 at which the bet process effect is completed, the output of the bet sound effect is continuously executed, but the lighting effect of the bet display units 34a to 34c is interrupted. Then, at the time of tb27, the bet display units 34a to 34c corresponding to the bet are turned on. As a result, the bet process effect started at tb26 is a bet-compatible effect in the situation where the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started at tb27, although the sound effect at the time of betting is output until tb28. It will be switched. By doing so, even though the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the bet number of the game in which the rotation is started cannot be grasped from the bet display unit 34 so as not to occur. It is possible to do.

FIG. 77 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process. In this modified example, if the start operation is performed in the middle of the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect, the execution of the bet process effect is restricted. However, the bet-corresponding effect should be started at the timing scheduled when the bet process effect was started.

In the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modification, the processes of step S3913, step S3919, step S3935 and step S3938 are added as compared with the process of FIG. 68, and the other processes correspond to those of FIG. 68. It is the same as the processing to be performed.

That is, in the situation of waiting until the second bet display unit 34b is turned on, it is determined in step S3933 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has elapsed in step S3934. If it is determined that the bet timer is set, the process of setting the restriction flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S3935, and then the process returns to step S3912 to wait until the bet timer becomes 0. When the bet timer becomes 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, and it is determined in step S3913 whether or not the above restriction flag is set. If it is not set, the second bet display unit 34b is turned on in step S3914, the process of outputting the bet sound effect is executed in step S3915, and then the previous bet number in step S3916 is set. Proceed to the process of determining whether or not the value was 2. On the other hand, when the restriction flag is set in step S3913, the process proceeds to step S3916 without performing the processes of steps S3914 and S3915.

If the previous bet number is 3 instead of 2 in step S3916, a process for waiting until the third bet display unit 34c is turned on is performed in step S3917.

Further, in the situation of waiting until the third bet display unit 34c is turned on, it is determined in step S3936 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has elapsed in step S3937. If it is determined that the bet timer is set, the process of setting the restriction flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S3938, and then the process returns to step S3918 and waits until the bet timer becomes 0. When the bet timer becomes 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S3918, and it is determined in step S3919 whether or not the above restriction flag is set. If it is not set, the third bet display unit 34c is turned on in step S3920, the process of outputting the bet sound effect is executed in step S3921, and then the specific re-game bet effect setting process is performed. finish.

If an affirmative decision is made in the process of determining whether or not the previous number of bets in step S3916 was 2, or if the restriction flag is set in step S3919, the process proceeds to step S3929 and the process of switching to the bet-compatible effect is performed. Run.

FIG. 74 (d) shows how the bet-corresponding effect is started at the timing scheduled at the time when the bet process effect is started, although the execution of the bet process effect is restricted.

Similar to tb1 to tb6, it is assumed that a bet is placed at tb31 to tb35 in the process for setting the re-game accompanying the winning of the specific re-game result, and after the wait period has elapsed, the bet number operation is performed at tb36. .. In this case, the betting process effect as a pseudo bet effect is started from tb36. For example, it is assumed that the bet process effect is set to be completed at tb38 at the start of the bet process effect, and the bet-compatible effect is set to start at tb38. When the start operation is performed at tb37, which is before tb38, the lighting effect and the output of the bet sound effect are interrupted. However, this tb37 does not switch to the bet-corresponding effect, and the state of tb37 is maintained for the lighting effect. Then, at tb38, the production is switched to bet support. Specifically, for example, when the first bet display unit 34a is lit at tb37 but the second bet display unit 34b and the third bet display unit 34c are off, tb37 to tb38 are the first bets. The situation in which only the display unit 34a is lit is maintained, and the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched to the lit state at tb38. By doing so, when the bet process production is restricted in the middle, it is not necessary to change from the scheduled execution (start) timing until the bet correspondence production, and it is possible to simplify the process. ..

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the relationship between the push order notification effect set in the start effect setting process, the specific combination notification effect, and the bet process effect in the modification when the start operation is performed during the bet process effect. , FIGS. 78 to 81 will be described. As described above, when the start operation is performed in the start effect setting process, the push order notification effect is executed before the wait period elapses, whereas the specific combination notification effect is performed after the wait period elapses. Therefore, it is executed at the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 78A shows the betting process effect of the above embodiment.

When the start operation is performed at ct1, the lottery process is performed and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started. When the result of the lottery process is a specific re-game result, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at tk2 and the specific re-game result winning is established, the bet is set in the re-game setting process. Will be. When the wait period from the start of rotation to ct1 elapses at tk6, the bet process production is started when the bet number operation is performed at ct3 before the elapse of the wait period. Then, when the start operation is performed at tc4, which is also before the elapse of the wait period and the bet process effect is being executed, the result of the lottery process based on the start operation of the tc4 is the push order notification effect. If it is not the result to be obtained and it is not the result of the specific combination, the betting process production is not interrupted at tk4 and is continued as it is. Then, the betting process production ends at ct5, and the betting process production is switched to the betting-compatible production. After that, at tk6 where the wait period elapses, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started.

FIG. 79 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process, and in this modified example, the presence or absence of restrictions on the bet process effect is different in relation to the push order notification effect.

In the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modification, the process of step S4022 is added as compared with the process of FIG. 68, and the other processes are the same as the corresponding process of FIG. 68.

That is, when the start operation command is received in step S4020, after the first credit lamp 56b is turned off in step S4021, the result of the current lottery process is based on the received start operation command in step S4022. Is a push order winning combination and has received a push order notification command, and it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the case where any push order notification effect is executed (see steps S2101 to S2107). If neither push order notification effect is executed, it is determined in step S4023 whether or not the wait period is in progress, and if it is in the wait period, the pseudo bet permission flag is set in step S4031. After executing, the process proceeds to the process of executing the betting process effect on the step S4006 side. If it is not during the wait period in step S4023, the process proceeds to the process of executing the bet-corresponding effect on the step S4024 side.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4022 that one of the push order notification effects is to be executed, the bet-corresponding effect on the step S4024 side is executed without determining whether or not the wait period is in step S4023. Proceed to processing.

FIG. 78B shows a case where the push order notification effect in the above modification is performed.

Similar to ct1 to ct3, when a bet is placed in the re-game setting process accompanying the winning of the specific re-game result in ct11 to ct13 and the bet number operation is performed in ct13 before the wait period elapses, the bet number operation is performed. The betting process production is started. Similarly, before the lapse of the wait period, when the start operation is performed at ct14 during which the betting process effect is being executed, the result of the lottery process based on the start operation of the ct14 is the result of performing the push order notification effect. If is, the push order notification effect is started from tk14. In this case, in this modification, even before the elapse of the wait period, the betting process effect that was scheduled to be executed up to tk15 is limited by tk14. By doing so, the betting process effect does not overlap with the push order notification effect, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to duplication of the effect and processing. In the figure, when the betting process effect is interrupted at ct14, the bet-compatible effect is switched to at ct14. The rotation start processing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the start operation of ct14 is performed at ct16 where the wait period elapses.

FIG. 78 (c) shows a case where the specific combination notification effect in the above modification is performed.

Similar to ct1 to ct3, when a bet is placed in the re-game setting process accompanying the winning of the specific re-game result in ct21 to ct23 and the bet number operation is performed in ct23 before the wait period elapses, the bet number operation is performed. The betting process production is started. Similarly, before the lapse of the wait period, when the start operation is performed at the ct24 in which the betting process effect is being executed, the result of the lottery process based on the start operation of the ct24 is the result of the specific combination notification effect. If this is the case, the specific combination notification effect is performed not from the ct24 but from the ct26 where the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started after the wait period elapses. In this case, in this modification, the betting process effect that was scheduled to be executed up to ct25 is not limited by ct24, but continues until ct25. In this way, even if it is an effect that accompanies the start operation, such as a specific role notification effect, if it does not overlap with the bet process effect, the bet process effect is not restricted so that the non-execution period of the effect is unnecessary. It is possible to prevent it from occurring.

FIG. 80 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process, and in this modified example, the push order notification effect side is limited due to the relationship between the push order notification effect and the bet process effect.

In the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modification, the processes of step S4122 and step S4123 are added as compared with the process of FIG. 68, and the other processes are the same as the corresponding processes of FIG. 68. ..

That is, when the start operation command is received in step S4120, after the first credit lamp 56b is turned off in step S4121, the start operation command received in step S4122 is used as the current start effect. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the case of executing the push order notification effect for the third replay (see steps S2101 to S2107). Even when neither push order notification effect is executed, or even when the push order notification effect is executed, the push order notification effect for the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination and the pushing order notification for the second replay are performed. If it is an effect, it is determined in step S4124 whether or not it is in the wait period, and if it is in the wait period, the process of setting the pseudo bet permission flag is executed in step S4132, and then the process is executed. Step S4 The process proceeds to the process of executing the betting process effect on the side. If it is not during the wait period in step S4124, the process proceeds to the process of executing the bet-corresponding effect on the step S4125 side.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4122 that the push order notification effect for the third replay is to be executed, after executing the process of setting the push order delay flag in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S4123. , Step S4123 is performed, and it is determined whether or not the wait period is in progress.

In the setting process of the push order notification effect in step S2104, step S2106 and step S2107 in the start time effect setting process (FIG. 52), the push order delay flag is set in step S4201 as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Determine if it is. If the push order delay flag is not set, the corresponding push order notification effect is executed in step S4202. On the other hand, when the push order delay flag is set, it is determined in step S4203 whether or not the betting process effect is completed, and if the bet process effect is not completed, the bet process effect is waited until the end. When the betting process effect is completed, the push order delay flag is cleared in step S4204, and then the push order notification effect is executed in step S4202.

FIG. 78 (d) shows how the push order notification effect side is restricted.

Similar to ct1 to ct3, when a bet is placed in the re-game setting process accompanying the winning of the specific re-game result in ct31 to ct33 and the bet number operation is performed in ct33 before the wait period elapses, the bet number operation is performed. The betting process production is started. Similarly, if the start operation is performed at ct34 during which the betting process effect is being executed before the lapse of the wait period, the result of the lottery process based on the start operation of the ct34 is the push order for the third replay. When the result is that the notification effect is performed, in this modification, the execution of the push order notification effect side is restricted. That is, if the execution of the bet process effect and the predetermined push order notification effect overlap before the elapse of the wait period, the execution of the push order notification effect is restricted, and the bet process effect started from tk34 ends. From tk35, the push order notification effect is started. In addition, tc35 is also before the elapse of the wait period. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the overlap between the bet process effect and the predetermined push order notification effect while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable that the bet process effect is switched to the bet-compatible effect in the middle. .. In the figure, the rotation start processing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the start operation of the ct34 is performed at the ct36 where the wait period elapses.

On the other hand, when the push order notification effect based on the start operation of the above tc34 is not the push order notification effect for the third replay, the push order notification effect is executed as it is as in the above tc13. The betting process production side is restricted.

Here, the push order notification effect notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. The push order combination is set so that the winning result differs depending on the operation order. Therefore, in order to encourage more careful operation, it is set to start the push order notification effect based on the start operation even before the lapse of the wait period. In particular, when the push order bell is won, the winning result differs depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning differs depending on the result. Therefore, among the push order notification effects, the push order notification effect at the time of winning the push order bell is restricted on the betting process effect side, so that the profit of the player can be suitably secured.

On the other hand, with respect to the normal rips A to C, although the re-game result of winning differs depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the profit of the player does not change regardless of which re-game result wins. Therefore, when the push order notification effect and the bet process effect at the time of winning the normal rips A to C overlap, the push order notification effect side is restricted, so that the player does not suffer any disadvantage. It is possible to eliminate the duplication of both productions.

Moreover, among the push order notification effects when the normal rips A to C are won, when the push order notification effect for the second replay and the bet process effect overlap, the bet process effect side is restricted, while the third. When the push order notification effect for replay and the bet process effect overlap, the push order notification effect side is restricted. The push order notification effect for the second re-game is executed at the start of the first AT mode, and the push order notification effect for the third re-game is executed at the start of the second AT mode. By limiting the notification effect, the player can detect that the second AT mode is started before the push order notification for the third re-game. By doing so, it is possible to create a novel playability such that the type of AT mode is grasped in advance by limiting the push order notification effect due to the overlap with the bet process effect.

Although not shown, the push order notification on the main control device 101 side is started at the operation timing of the start lever 41 even when the push order notification effect side is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who wants to detect the operation sequence at an earlier stage.

When the push order notification effect for the third re-game and the bet process effect overlap, the push order notification effect side is always restricted, but the push order notification side has a predetermined probability after a lottery or the like. May be configured to limit. In addition, when the push order notification effect for the second replay and the bet process effect overlap, the bet process effect side is always restricted, but the push order notification side is set with a predetermined probability through a lottery or the like. It may be a configuration to limit. In these cases, any AT mode is started through the difference between the ratio in which the push order notification effect side for the second re-game is restricted and the ratio in which the push order notification effect side for the third re-game is restricted. It is possible to predict whether or not, and by making the ratio of the push order notification effect side for the third replay that starts the advantageous AT mode higher, the relationship with the bet process effect. It is possible to create a new playability such as making it desired that the push order notification production side is restricted. Further, the above ratio may be determined by the selection rate determined by the AT type determination process, and the bet process effect can be achieved by limiting the push order notification effect in the AT mode, which is easier to select. The number of restricted scenes is reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of discomfort due to the restriction of the betting process production.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, FIG. 82 shows a modification of the reel effect using the operation modes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the bet process effect. This description will be given with reference to FIG. 84. The reel effect is an effect executed by the freeze lottery process in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and is an effect executed by the rotation effect process (step S401) in the reel control process (FIG. 22). Here, as a reel effect, when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the "red 7" symbol is displayed with the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44. A first freeze effect such as aligning in the middle stage and a second freeze effect of waiting for the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) will be described. That is, the first freeze effect is a reel effect using an operation mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotated, and the second freeze effect is a reel effect using an operation mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not rotated. be.

FIG. 82 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process, and in the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modified example, step S4322, step S4333, and step S4336 are compared with the process of FIG. 68. The processing of is added, and the other processing is the same as the corresponding processing of FIG. 68.

That is, it is determined that the start operation command has been received in step S4320, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off in step S4321, and then the freeze is performed this time based on the received start operation command in step S4322. Execution of the lottery process It is determined whether or not the first freeze command indicating that the result of the lottery corresponds to the execution of the first freeze effect is received. If the first freeze command has not been received, the process proceeds to the process of determining whether or not the wait period is in progress in step S4323. On the other hand, when the first freeze command is received, the process proceeds to the process of performing the bet correspondence effect on the step S4324 side without determining whether or not the wait period of step S4323 is in progress.

Further, when the start operation command is received in the waiting state until the second bet display unit 34b and the third bet display unit 34c are turned on in the bet process effect (when affirmative determination is made in step S4332 or step S4335). In step S4333 and step S4336, it is determined whether or not the first freeze command is received as the received start operation command. When the first freeze effect is executed, the process shifts to the process of switching to the bet-compatible effect as it is without performing the determination process (step S4334 or step S4337) of whether or not the wait period is in progress. On the other hand, if the first freeze command has not been received, the process proceeds to determine whether or not the wait period is in progress.

In FIG. 83A, the bet number operation is performed at td1, the betting process effect is performed up to td2, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the start operation performed at td3. The case where the result of the lottery process based on the start operation was a specific re-gambling result is shown. At td4, a specific re-gaming result winning is established, the re-gaming state is set, and after the wait period has elapsed at td5, the bet number operation is performed at td6, and the betting process production in the pseudo-bet production is started. To. Then, it is assumed that the start operation is performed at td7, which is before td8 at which the bet process effect is completed, and the above-mentioned first freeze effect is performed by the lottery process based on the start operation.

In this case, although the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started from td7, the rotation start based on the rotation start processing (step S402) in the reel control processing (FIG. 22) is from td9 where the first freeze effect ends. It will be started. That is, normally, based on the start operation, start drive control is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to reach a constant speed rotation, and then the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated. On the premise of the above configuration, when the reel effect is performed, the specific drive control for the reel effect is performed before the start drive control. In td7 to td9, the first specific drive control is performed as the specific drive control for the first freeze effect accompanied by the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the start drive control is performed from td9.

Then, the betting process effect started from td6 does not overlap with the above-mentioned start drive control based on the start operation of td7. However, in this case, since the first specific drive control in the first freeze effect is performed from td7 and the bet process effect overlaps with the first specific drive control, the bet process effect is interrupted at td7. It is supposed to be. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the overlap between the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the betting process effect. In the figure, when the betting process effect is interrupted at td7, the bet-compatible effect is switched to at td7.

FIG. 83B shows the case of the second freeze effect.

td11 to td16 are the same as td1 to td6, and the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is started based on the bet number operation of td16. It is assumed that the start operation is performed at td17, which is before td18 at which the bet process effect is completed, and it is determined that the above-mentioned second freeze effect is performed by the lottery process based on the start operation.

As described above, when the reel effect at the start of rotation is performed, the specific drive control for the reel effect is performed before the start drive control, but td17 to td19 are used as the specific drive control for the second freeze effect. The second specific drive control is performed, and the start drive control is performed from td19. Therefore, in this modification, the betting process effect started from td16 is not interrupted by td17, but is executed up to td18 to switch to the bet-compatible effect. That is, in td17 to td18, the bet process effect and the second specific drive control for the second freeze effect overlap. Since the second specific drive control is a drive control that does not involve rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as described above, it is considered that an extreme increase in processing load is unlikely to occur even if they are overlapped in this way. .. Moreover, since the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has not actually started, the betting process production is interrupted in the middle even though the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has not started. It is also possible not to give the player a sense of discomfort.

A modified example of the freeze effect lottery will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the freeze lottery process in the lottery process (FIG. 19).

In step S4401, a freeze execution lottery is performed. In the freeze lottery, for example, when the lottery result of this game is a result (specific role) that is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery (for example, normal rips A to C). ) Is set so that it is easier to win the freeze lottery. Further, the winning probability may be different depending on the type of freeze effect to be executed. Then, in step S4402, it is determined whether or not the result of the freeze execution lottery corresponds to the execution of the first freeze effect. When executing the first freeze effect, the freeze lottery is performed after the process of setting the first freeze flag in step S4403 and setting the first freeze command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4404. End the process. When the first freeze flag is set, the rotation effect processing of the reel control process controls to perform the first freeze effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S4402, it is determined in step S4405 whether or not the result of the freeze execution lottery corresponds to the execution of the second freeze effect. When executing the second freeze effect, the second freeze flag is set in step S4406, the second freeze command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4407, and then the freeze lottery is executed. End the process. When the second freeze flag is set, the rotation effect processing of the reel control process controls to perform the second freeze effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S4405, the specific replay flag is set in step S4408, and the start operation this time is within a predetermined period (within 0.4 sec) after any bet number operation is performed. Judge whether or not the operation was. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4408, the process proceeds to step S4406 to perform a process for executing the second freeze effect. That is, when the specific replay flag is set and the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the second freeze is performed even if the result of the freeze execution lottery does not correspond to the execution of the second freeze effect. The production is executed.

FIG. 83 (c) shows a case where the result of the freeze lottery corresponds to the execution of the second freeze effect, and td21 to td26 are the same as the above td1 to td6, and the bet number operation of td26 is shown. Based on, the betting process production in the pseudo-bet production is started. When the start operation is performed at td28 after the betting process effect is completed at td28 and the second freeze effect is won, the second specific drive control of the second freeze effect is performed from the td28 to td29, and then. , The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started (start drive control is performed).

FIG. 83 (d) shows a case where the result of the freeze lottery is not the result corresponding to the execution of the second freeze effect, and the bet process effect started at td36 is set to td37 before the completion of td38. Indicates that the start operation has been performed. In addition, td31 to td36 are the same as the above-mentioned td1 to td6. In this case, in this modification, even if the second freeze effect is not won, the second freeze effect is executed, and the bet process effect is executed up to td38 without interruption in the middle. To do so. In this way, when the start operation is performed during the betting process production, the event that the betting process production is interrupted in the middle can be reduced by intentionally executing the second freeze effect. It is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of discomfort due to interruption in the middle. The second freeze effect started at td37 is executed up to td39, and rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started from the td39 (start drive control is performed).

<Modification example 4>
In this deformability, in the re-gaming state set based on the specific re-gaming result winning, the mode of the pseudo-bet effect is different depending on the type of the bet number operation executed.

FIG. 85A shows an embodiment of a pseudo bet effect according to the type of bet number operation in the above embodiment.

In a game in which the specific number of cards is set to 3, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated by te1, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet display unit 34c are sequentially arranged. The betting process effect in the lit normal bet effect is executed, and the bet-compatible effect is switched to te2. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state by te1. When the start operation is performed in te3 and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and the result of the lottery process based on the start operation is the specific replay result, each reel 32L is in te4. , 32M, 32R are stopped and the specific re-game result winning is established, the bet corresponding to the specific number of 3 cards is placed in the re-game setting process.

When the bet number operation in which medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 instead of the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed in te5 in this re-gaming state, a specific insertion command is output from the main control device 101 as described above. Then, a pseudo bet effect based on the specific input command is executed. That is, the bet process effect in which the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet display unit 34c are sequentially lit is executed, and the bet corresponding effect is switched to te6. Further, at te5, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. That is, in the above embodiment, not only when the bet number operation is performed by the first credit insertion switch 56 in the re-gaming state based on the specific re-game result winning, but also one medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45. Even when the bet number operation is performed, the betting process effect corresponding to three bets, which is the same number of bets as the number bet in the lottery resulting in the specific replay result, is executed.

In te5, the case where the bet number operation for inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45 is performed is shown, but similarly, the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 as the bet number operation corresponding to one bet is performed. Even so, in the pseudo-bet effect based on the output of the specific second operation command, bets are made so that the number of bets is the same as the number of bets that were bet in the lottery that resulted in the specific re-game result. The process is directed.

By the way, even if medals are further inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 after the betting process production is performed, the betting process production is not executed, the betting sound effect is not output, and only the credit counter is added. The credit increase sound effect is output. On the other hand, even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated after the betting process effect is performed, the betting sound effect is not output and the credit counter is not added.

FIG. 86 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process, and in the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modified example, the processes of steps S4505 and S4506 are compared with the process of FIG. 68. Has been added.

That is, if it is determined in step S4504 that any of the specific input command, the specific first operation command, and the specific second operation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4505. In step S4505, it is determined whether or not the received command is a specific input command or a specific second operation command. If it is the specific first command, the process proceeds to step S4507 and the process for producing the betting process effect is executed. On the other hand, in the case of the specific input command or the specific second operation command, the single bet effect setting process is executed in step S4506, and then the specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated. The single bet effect setting process in step S4506 is as shown in FIG. However, in the single bet effect setting process in this case, the process of setting the extinguished flag in step S3002 is not performed.

In FIG. 85 (b), in the re-gaming state based on the specific re-game result winning, the bet number operation corresponding to one bet operation such as the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 45 is performed. Shows the case.

Similar to te1 to te4, when one medal is inserted from the medal slot 45 in te15 in the situation where the replay state is set based on the specific replay result winning in te11 to te14, the betting effect. After the betting process effect in which the first bet display unit 34a is lit together with the sound, the bet corresponding effect indicating the state in which one bet is made by te16 is obtained. Further, when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated in te17, two bets are made in te18 through a betting process effect in which the second bet display unit 34b is lit together with a betting sound effect. It will be a bet-compatible effect that shows the state of the bet. Then, when one medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 at te19, three bets are bet at te20 after a betting process effect in which the third bet display unit 34c is lit together with a betting sound effect. It will be a bet-compatible production that shows the state in which. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b is kept lit until te19. That is, in the pseudo-bet effect, the effect corresponding to the single-bet effect is performed, and by doing so, the pseudo-bet effect is made to have the same mode as the actual bet effect (single-bet effect). It is possible to help give the impression that the specific replay result is treated the same as other small role results and out-of-game results.

FIG. 85 (c) shows a case where the start operation is performed in the middle of the configuration in which the single bet effect is performed by the pseudo bet effect as shown in FIG. 85 (b).

In te21 to te28, similarly to te11 to te18, in the replay state based on the specific replay result winning, the pseudo bet effect corresponding to one bet is executed in te25 to te28, and the first bet display unit 34a and the first bet display unit 34a and The second bet display unit 34b is lit and is in a bet-corresponding state corresponding to two bets being made. In such a situation, when the start operation is performed on the te29 and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the execution of the betting process effect is restricted in the te29, and the third bet display unit 34c is lit. However, the sound effect at the time of betting is not output. That is, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started in a state where the bet-corresponding effect corresponding to the three bets being made is performed. Further, in this case, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the extinguished state at te29 where the start operation is performed.

FIG. 85 (d) shows a bet-corresponding effect corresponding to one bet operation such as the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 45, even in the pseudo-bet effect. An example of limiting is shown. Although detailed description of the specific replay bet effect setting process in this case will be omitted in FIG. 86, when it is determined in step S4505 that the specific input command or the specific second operation command has been received, it is determined that the specific replay bet effect setting process has been received. After turning off the first credit lamp 56b, the output processing of the bet sound effect in step S3005 in the single bet effect setting process (FIG. 69) is executed, and then the specific replay bet effect setting process is completed. To do.

te31 to te34 are the same as te1 to te4, and are set to the replay state based on the specific replay result winning. When one medal is inserted from the medal slot 45 at te35, the execution of the betting process effect is restricted and the bet-compatible effect is switched to. Then, at te35, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the extinguished state. In this case, even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated at te36 or medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 at te37, the betting process effect is not executed. However, the sound effect at the time of betting is output in correspondence with the betting operation of each one of te35, te36, and te37. That is, in each one betting operation of te35, te36, and te37, the execution mode is limited so that only the betting sound effect in the betting process effect is executed. In this way, by outputting the bet sound effect, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and the player can clearly grasp that each bet operation has been accepted. .. In this case as well, even if a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 at te38 after the betting sound effect for three sheets is output, the betting process effect is not executed and the betting sound effect is further output. It is better not to add only the credit counter. Further, in this case as well, the credit increase sound effect may be output when the credit counter is added.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, the temporary standby state and the standby state are set even in the replay state. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the standby state setting process in this modification.

The standby state setting process in this modification is different from the process of FIG. 71 in that the count of the standby counter is permitted even in the replay state, and the other processes are different from the corresponding processes in FIG. 71. The same is true.

That is, when it is determined in step S4601 that no game operation has been performed, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not the reel is rotating, and in step S4603 it is determined whether or not the medal is being paid out. do. If the reel is not rotating and the medal is not being paid out, the process of permitting the count of the standby counter is executed in step S4603. If the reel is rotating or the medal is being paid out, the process of disallowing the count of the standby counter is executed in step S4605.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a standby process in this modification. In the standby process in this modification, the processes of step S4702, step S4704, step S4714, step S4716 and steps S4719 to S4722 are added as compared with the process of FIG. 72, and the other processes are the above-mentioned FIG. 72. It is the same as the corresponding processing in.

That is, when the game ends in step S4713, it is determined in step S4714 whether or not the specific replay result winning is established. If the result is a game other than the specific re-game result winning, the process of starting the measurement of the display continuation counter is executed in step S4715. In the case of winning the specific re-game result, the process of setting the specific re-game status flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S4716, and then the process proceeds to the measurement start process of the display continuation counter in step S4715.

Further, when the display continuation counter reaches 30 sec corresponding to the first transition period (step S4718: YES) without performing any game operation in step S4717, the specific re-game status flag is set in step S4719. Determine if it is set. If it is not set, the process for the temporary standby state in step S4720 and step S4721 is executed. The process of step S4720 and step S4721 is the same as the process of step S3616 and step S3617, and is a process of turning off the bet display unit 34 and the first credit lamp 56b.

On the other hand, when the first transition period has elapsed after winning the specific replay result (step S4719: YES), the process of turning off the bet display unit 34 is executed in step S4722, and the first credit lamp 56b is executed in step S4723. Executes the process of blinking, and then ends the standby process. That is, the provisional standby state after winning the specific replay result is different from the provisional standby state after the other results in the notification mode of the first credit lamp 56b.

Further, when it is determined in step S4701 that the second transition period up to the standby state has elapsed, it is determined in step S4702 whether or not the above-mentioned specific replay state flag is set. If it is not set, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, the bet display unit 34, and the first credit lamp 56b are set to the standby mode in steps S4703 to S4707. The processing of steps S4703 to S4707 is the same as the processing of steps S3602 to S3605.

On the other hand, when the second transition period has elapsed after winning the specific re-game result (step S4702: YES), for example, in order to notify the auxiliary display unit 65 that the specific re-game result winning has been established in step S4704, for example. Control to display characters such as "A big chance is occurring !!". After that, in steps S4705 to S4707, a process of setting the speaker 64, the bet display unit 34, and the first credit lamp 56b to the standby mode is executed.

FIG. 89 is a timing chart showing a temporary standby state and a standby state in this modification.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a1), when the game started at tf1 is a normal re-game result winning and the normal re-game result winning is established at tf2, the first transition period (TA) has elapsed from tf2. When tf3 is reached, the temporary standby state is set. In this case, the bet display unit 34 is turned off. By the way, the first credit lamp 56b remains in the extinguished state because it is usually after the replay result winning. After that, when the second transition period (TB) elapses from tf2 to tf4, the standby state is set. In this case, the BET display unit 75 is turned off, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is also set to the standby mode (FIG. 89 (a2)).

As shown in FIG. 89 (b1), when the game started at tf11 is a small winning combination result and the game ends at tf12, when the first transition period (TA) elapses from tf12 to tf13. , Is set to the temporary standby state. In this case, the bet display unit 34 and the first credit lamp 56b are turned off. After that, when the second transition period (TB) elapses from tf12 to tf14, the standby state is set. In this case, the BET display unit 75 is turned off, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is also set to the standby mode (FIG. 89 (b2)).

As shown in FIG. 89 (c1), when the game started at tf21 is a specific replay result winning and the specific replay result winning is established at tf22, the first transition period (TA) has elapsed from tf22. When the tf23 is reached, the temporary standby state is set. In this case, the bet display unit 34 is turned off and the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. After that, when the second transition period (TB) elapses from tf22 to tf24, the standby state is set. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b and the BET display unit 75 are turned off, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is also set to the standby mode. However, the display mode of the auxiliary display unit 65 is different from that of FIGS. 89 (a2) and 89 (b2) (FIG. 89 (c2)).

As described above, after the game such as the specific replay result winning or the small winning combination is completed, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on. However, in this modification, when the first transition period elapses and the temporary standby state is entered, the light is turned off after the small winning combination result and the like, but the blinking state is obtained after the specific re-game result is won. Therefore, although it is not possible to discriminate between the specific replay result and the small winning combination result from the notification mode of the first credit lamp 56b before the transition to the temporary standby state, it is possible to discriminate after the transition to the temporary standby state. It will be possible.

On the other hand, regardless of the result, the bet display unit 34 is turned off when it is in the temporary standby state. Here, the bet display unit 34 is provided on the game panel 25 facing the front of the slot machine 10. On the other hand, the first credit lamp 56b is built in the first credit input switch 56 which is below the game panel 25 and protrudes upward from the operation surface intersecting the game panel 25 (FIG. 1). , See Figure 2). In this case, when the slot machine 10 is visually recognized from a place away from the slot machine 10, such as when the slot machine 10 is visually recognized from the edge of an island where a plurality of game consoles are arranged side by side, it is possible to confirm whether or not the bet display unit 34 is lit. However, it is not possible to confirm whether or not the first credit lamp 56b is lit, or it is more difficult to confirm than the bet display unit 34. Therefore, if it is attempted to confirm whether or not the first credit lamp 56b is in the lighting state (blinking state) as described above, it may be necessary to come close to the slot machine 10 and confirm. In this way, by making it difficult to check the state of the slot machine 10 at first glance, even if it is not in the desired state, it can be a motivation to make you think that you should play a game because you have come close. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate of the slot machine 10.

Further, when the state shifts to the standby state, the first credit lamp 56b and the bet display unit 34 are turned off after any result, but the display mode of the auxiliary display unit 65 is different only after the specific replay result winning. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the slot machine 10 from being left unattended in a situation where a specific re-game result winning is established and there is a sufficient possibility that the slot machine 10 has been won in the AT mode transition lottery or the like. Is possible.

<Modification 6>
In this modification, the notification when the credit is cleared by operating the clearing switch 59 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a medal return process in this modified example. The medal return process is a process executed in step S206 in the normal process (FIG. 18).

In step S4801, it is determined whether or not the clearing switch 59 has been operated, and if it has not been operated, the medal return process is terminated as it is. If the clearing switch 59 is operated, the process proceeds to step S4802. In step S4802, the specific re-game flag is set in the immediately preceding BET process, and it is determined whether or not the re-game state is based on the specific re-game result winning. If the specific replay flag is not set, the process of setting the clearing command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S4803.

In the following step S4804, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game flags is set, and if neither of the re-game flags is set and the re-game state is not set, the BET counter and the credit counter are set in step S4805. The hopper device 51 is controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the total number of medals is paid out. After that, in step S4806, the process of clearing the BET counter and the credit counter to 0 is executed, and then the process of returning the medal is completed.

When any of the re-gaming flags is set in step S4804 and the re-gaming state is set, the hopper device 51 is controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter is paid out in step S4807. After that, the process of clearing the credit counter to 0 is executed in step S4808, and then the process of returning the medal is completed.

That is, in this modification, the credit can be settled even in the re-gaming state, and the medals including the bet virtual medals are paid out in the re-gaming state. The medals will be paid out except for the virtual medals bet. Therefore, in the re-game state, the credit can be cleared by operating the clearing switch 59, but even after the clearing, at least one game can be played without requiring a new medal. Will be done. Such a configuration solves the problem that the re-game result winning cannot be continuously ended in a situation where the end of the game is urgently required, for example, when the game hall is closed, but the re-game result is obtained. It is a configuration to clearly distinguish between the small role result and the small role result, and by doing so, it is possible to end the game even if the right to play one game is abandoned, and a variety of players can play. It is possible to meet the needs.

However, among the re-gaming states, in the re-gaming state based on the specific re-game result winning, there is a high possibility that not only the right to play one game but also the AT mode winning based on the specific combination winning as described above. However, ending the game as it is is likely to lead to a large loss for the player. Therefore, when it is determined in step S4802 that the specific re-game flag is set, it is specified, for example, whether or not the third transition period has elapsed since the specific re-game flag was set in step S4809. Judgment is made using a timer counter or the like that starts measurement after setting the replay flag. In this modification, 20 sec is set as the third transition period, and the 20 sec is shorter than the second transition period set in the standby state and shorter than the first transition period set in the temporary standby state. It is set. If the third transition period has not passed, the medal return process is terminated as it is.

That is, in this modification, the credit cannot be cleared even if the clearing switch 59 is operated until the third transition period elapses after the replay state based on the specific replay result winning.

When the third transition period has elapsed in step S4809, the process of adding 1 to the clearing operation counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S4810, and the clearing operation counter is set as a specific number in step S4811. It is determined whether or not 2 has been reached. If it has not reached 2, that is, if it is the first clearing operation even after the third transition period has elapsed, the medal return process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result winning, even if the clearing switch 59 is operated, the clearing of credits may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress the abandonment of the AT mode winning or the like based on the winning of the specific replay result.

When the number of clearing operation counters reaches a specific number in step S4811, after clearing the clearing operation counter in step S4812, a process of setting a specific clearing command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S4813. .. After that, the processing for clearing the credit is performed in steps S4804 to S4808. That is, in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result winning, it is set so that the credit can be settled by performing the clearing operation of a specific number.

The return effect processing on the display control device 81 side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The return effect process is a process performed as one of the other processes (step S2011) in the effect setting process (FIG. 51).

In step S4901, it is determined whether or not any of the above clearing commands and specific clearing commands has been received, and if not, the return-time effect process ends as it is. If any of the commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S4902.

In step S4902, subtraction of the return period counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is started. The return period counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the duration of the sound effect at the time of settlement (sound effect at the time of return), and the initial value is set to 5000. The return period counter is decremented by 1 in a 2 sec cycle and becomes 0 in 10 sec.

In the following step S4903, it is determined whether or not the specific clearing command is received, and if it is a clearing command instead of the specific clearing command, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the return sound effect is output in step S4904. Then, in step S4905, it is determined whether or not the return period counter is 0, and the process waits until it becomes 0. If it becomes 0, the output of the above-mentioned return sound effect is stopped in step S4906, and then the return effect processing is terminated. As the return sound effect, for example, an announcement such as "Ping pawn has been cleared" is set to be repeated over a predetermined period. In addition, it is preferable that the return sound effect is performed at a loud volume (maximum volume), and by doing so, a fraudulent act of illegally operating the hopper device 51 and a regular clearing operation can be performed. It becomes easier for the manager of the game hall to distinguish.

If the specific clearing command is received in step S4903, the process proceeds to step S4907. The process of step S49047 step S4921 is the same process as the process of steps S3405-step S3419 in the specific replay bet effect setting process (FIG. 68). That is, by the processing of steps S4907 to S4921, the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is executed.

Then, after the betting process effect is completed in step S4921 and the effect is switched to the bet corresponding effect in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result winning, the above return sound effect is output in step S4904. After executing the process, the effect process at the time of return is terminated.

The state in which the credit is settled will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 92 (a) shows how the settlement is performed after the small winning combination result and the like.

That is, it is assumed that the bet number operation is performed at tg1 and the betting process effect is completed at tg2, then the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started at tg3 and stopped at tg4, and the lottery process of tg2 is performed. The result of is a small winning combination result. In this case, when the clearing switch 59 is operated at tg5, medals are paid out up to tg6. Here, since the credit counter becomes 0 by the settlement as described above, the first credit lamp 56 is also turned off at tg5. In addition, the predetermined period during which the above return sound effect is executed is set as a longer period than the total number (53) of medals, which is the maximum number of credit counters and the maximum number of bet counters, is paid out. The return sound effect continues until tg7, which is after tg6 when the return of the medal is completed. By the way, in this modification, the length of the sound effect at the time of return is set as a uniform predetermined period (TC, 10 sec) regardless of the number of medals returned, and by doing so, the storage capacity can be reduced. It is possible to plan.

FIG. 92 (b) shows how the settlement is performed after winning the specific replay result.

That is, the game is completed at tg11 to tg14 as in tg1 to tg4, and the regame setting process based on the specific regame result winning is performed at tg14. Even if the clearing switch 59 is operated at t15 after the third transition period has elapsed, clearing is not performed because the clearing operation counter is 1. At the subsequent tg16, the clearing switch 59 is operated again, so that the clearing operation counter becomes 2, and clearing is started. However, at tg16, the output of the return sound effect is not started. Instead, the betting process effect is performed from tg16 to tg17, and the bet-compatible effect is switched to tg17. When the betting process effect is completed at tg17, the output of the clearing sound effect is started from the tg17, and the output of the clearing sound effect continues until tg19. The return of the medal will be completed at tg18.

Here, in this modification, the length of the clearing sound effect when the specific clearing command is received is set to be the length obtained by subtracting the length from which the betting process effect is performed from the above-mentioned predetermined period. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the sound effect at the time of clearing based on the specific clearing command from causing inconvenience or discomfort that continues unnecessarily for a long time even after the completion of returning the medal.

If the start operation is performed at tg20 without going through the bet number operation after tg19 when the output of the clearing sound effect is completed, the bet is made in the re-gaming state as described above. It is possible to start a game corresponding to.

In this way, in the re-gaming state based on the specific re-game result winning, the clearing may be restricted even if the clearing switch 59 is operated, so that the player does not notice the specific re-gaming result winning. It is possible to suitably suppress the end of the game.

In addition, even in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result prize, clearing is possible by operating the clearing switch 59 over a specific number, and it is also necessary for the player who wants to end the game while knowing it. It will be possible to respond.

However, it is considered that there are some players who try to clear by repeatedly hitting the clearing switch 59 without noticing the winning of the specific replay result because the game is finished in a hurry. Therefore, as described above, although clearing is possible by operating the clearing switch 59, in such a case, a pseudo bet effect is performed, so that the specific replay result winning is noticed as described above. It can be expected that even the player who made the settlement without doing so will notice it, and it will be possible to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

Moreover, the pseudo-bet effect based on the operation of the clearing switch 59 is set so as not to overlap with the clearing sound effect. As a result, it becomes easier to notice due to the pseudo bet effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of making it difficult to cause a scene in which the benefit of winning the specific replay result is abandoned.

The configuration for preventing the above-mentioned clearing sound effect and the pseudo-bet effect from overlapping may be changed as follows.

FIG. 92 (c) shows how the sound effect at the time of clearing is output first and the pseudo bet effect is executed later when the clearing is performed in the replay state based on the specific replay result winning. ..

That is, similarly to tg11 to tg14, the replay state is set based on the specific replay result winning at tg21 to tg24, and the clearing switch 59 is operated at tg25 and tg26 to clear the credit. .. In this case, the medal is returned from the tg26, and the output of the return sound effect is started from the tg26. Then, when the return of the medal is completed at tg27, the pseudo-bet effect is started from the tg27. The pseudo bet effect is executed up to tg29. That is, tg26 to tg28 are set as the output period of the return sound effect, and in tg27 to tg28, the bet process effect side is prioritized and the output of the return sound effect is limited.

In this case, when the clearing is started, the output of the return sound effect is started, but since the first credit lamp 56b is turned off at tg27 where the pseudo-bet effect is started, the clearing is started. Nevertheless, by keeping the first credit lamp 56b in the lit state, it is possible to make it easier to notice the winning of the specific replay result.

As described above, even if the settlement is performed in the re-gaming state based on the specific re-gaming result winning, the game can be played without requiring a new bet because it is in the re-gaming state. In FIG. 92 (d), the timing at which the game is started after the settlement is performed is different in FIG. 92 (b).

That is, tg31 to tg38 are the same as the above tg11 to tg18, indicating that the medal return started from tg36 is completed at tg38. Further, a pseudo bet effect is performed from tg36, and a return sound effect is output from tg37. Under such circumstances, when the start operation is performed at tg39, which is before the tg40 where the return sound effect is scheduled to end, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the tg39. .. Therefore, in such a situation, it is advisable to end the return sound effect at tg39. By doing so, it is possible to avoid duplication of the effect and processing at the start of rotation with the sound effect at the time of return and the processing for it.

<Modification 7>
In this modification, the mode of the pseudo-bet effect is changed. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a specific replay bet effect setting process in this modification.

In the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modification, as compared with the process of FIG. 68, the bet interval of the bet process effect based on the bet number operation and the bet process even when the bet correspondence effect is performed based on the start operation. The difference is that the effect is performed, and the other processes are the same as the corresponding processes in FIG. 68.

That is, in this modification, in the process of setting the bet interval of the betting process effect based on the bet number operation (step S5011 and step S5016), the interval is longer than the interval (about 0.1 sec) of the above embodiment. Set 2 sec. That is, the interval between bets in the bet process effect of the pseudo-bet effect in this modification is the same as the interval between the bets in the bet process effect of the re-game bet effect, which is normally executed based on the re-game result winning. Yes, the betting process effect of the pseudo bet effect has the same notification mode as the bet process effect of the replay bet effect.

Further, in this modification, when it is determined in step S5020 that the start operation command is received, the first credit lamp 56b and all bet display units 34a to 34c are turned off (step S5021, step S5023). After executing the process of turning on the first bet display unit 34a in step S5025, in this modification, the process of outputting the bet sound effect is executed in step S5026.

Then, in step S5027, it is determined whether or not the previous bet number was 1, and if it is not 1, the process proceeds to step S5028 and the process of inputting 67 corresponding to about 0.1 sec to the bet timer is executed. , Wait until the bet timer becomes 0 in step S5029. When the bet timer becomes 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S5029, a process of turning on the second bet display unit 34b in step S5030 is executed, and a bet sound effect is output in step S5031. Execute the process.

In the following step S5032, it is determined whether or not the previous bet number was 2, and if it is not 2, the process proceeds to step S5033 and the process of inputting 67 corresponding to about 0.1 sec to the bet timer is executed. In step S5034, the bet timer waits until it becomes 0. When the bet timer becomes 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S5034, a process of turning on the third bet display unit 34c in step S5035 is executed, and a bet sound effect is output in step S5036. After executing the process, the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S5027 or step S5032, the specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated as it is.

That is, in this modification, when any bet number operation is performed in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result winning, the bet process effect and the notification mode are common to the bet process effect in the re-game bet effect. After executing, switch to the bet-compatible production. On the other hand, in the re-gaming state, when the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, the bet process effect having the same notification mode as the bet process effect in the continuous bet effect is executed, and then the bet-compatible effect is switched to. .. As described above, the bet process effect in the continuous bet effect is set so that the period required for the effect is shorter than the bet process effect in the replay bet effect. Therefore, by performing the above, in the re-gaming state based on the specific re-game result winning, when the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, the pseudo-bet effect based on the bet number operation is performed. It is possible to end the bet process effect at an early stage and switch to the bet-compatible effect, and it is possible to reduce the overlap between the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the bet process effect.

Further, as already described, in the specific replay bet effect setting process, even if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, if the wait period has not elapsed (step S5022: YES), An effect similar to the pseudo bet effect based on the bet number operation is performed. That is, in this modification, it can be said that when the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, the notification mode of the bet process effect differs between before and after the lapse of the wait period. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the bet effect well according to the progress of the game such as whether or not the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started.

In this case, as in the above-mentioned modification, by switching to the bet-corresponding effect via the bet process effect, it is possible to minimize the difference between the two notification modes, and the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable while adjusting the bet effect.

Moreover, each of the notification modes is a notification mode used for other bet productions, and the notification mode before the elapse of the wait period is common to the notification mode in the replay bet production, and the notification mode after the elapse of the wait period The mode is common to the notification mode in the continuous bet production. By doing so, in order to change the notification mode of the bet effect according to the progress of the game, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated notification mode, and it is possible to reduce the amount of stored data.

In particular, since both notification modes differ only in the interval at which the bet display units 34a to 34c are turned on, it is possible to change the notification mode of the bet effect only by adjusting the interval. Therefore, it is possible to match the bet effect with the progress of the game with an extremely simple configuration.

In addition, since only the bet interval is adjusted, if the wait period elapses during the bet process effect, even if the bet effect is switched to the side on which the wait period has elapsed, the interval is only shifted. While completing the betting process production at an early stage, it can be expected to have the effect of reducing the discomfort given to the player.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description contents of each embodiment and each modification described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be individually applied to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied.

(1) The explanation has been made on the premise that the re-game setting process is executed as one process of the BET process at the start of the game, but for the re-game setting when the re-game result winning is established at the end of the game. It may be configured to perform processing. More specifically, in the payout determination process (step S413) in the reel control process (FIG. 22), the re-game setting process may be executed when the re-game result winning is established. Further, the re-game setting process may be executed in the medal payout process (step S214) in the normal process (FIG. 18).

(2) When the normal re-game result prize is established, the BET display unit 75 is turned on in sequence, and when the specific re-game result prize is established, the BET display unit 75 is lit at the same time. Although the configuration is set to the state, such a configuration may be changed. That is, even when the specific replay result winning is established, the BET display unit 75 may be sequentially turned on. In this case, the intervals at which the BET display units 75a to 75c are turned on may be the same or substantially the same interval between the normal re-game result and the specific re-game result, or may be different intervals. However, in order not to cause a scene where the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not started when the start operation is performed during the betting process production in the pseudo bet production based on the specific replay result winning, it is specified. It is preferable that the interval for turning on each BET display unit 75a to 75c based on the re-game result winning is shorter than that in the case of the normal re-game result. The interval may be the same as or substantially the same as the interval for lighting the state, or the interval may be shorter than the interval for lighting each BET display unit 75a to 75c in the first operation corresponding process.

(3) A re-game other than the first re-game is regarded as a specific re-game result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on when the specific re-game result is won, and a pseudo bet effect is produced based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 or the like. However, even after other results, the first credit lamp 56b may be turned on or a pseudo bet effect may be performed in the same manner. For example, even after the normal re-game result winning as the first re-game is established, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on (blinks), and the first credit insertion switch 56, etc. It may be configured to perform a pseudo bet effect based on the operation of. Further, even if a predetermined small winning combination result or a deviation result is satisfied, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on if the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a pseudo bet effect is performed based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 or the like. May be. As the predetermined condition, for example, there may be a case where some kind of game state transition occurs, or a case where a predetermined effect is set as a bet time effect or a start time effect. When the first credit lamp 56b is turned on or a pseudo bet effect is performed based on the normal re-game result, it is preferable to complete the automatic insertion process of the virtual medal at an early stage as in the case of the above-mentioned specific re-game result. Specifically, even if it is a normal re-game result, it is preferable that the automatic charging process is performed in the processes of steps S2414 to S2416.

(4) In the pseudo bet effect, if the wait period has not elapsed, the bet-compatible effect is not switched even if the start operation is performed during the bet process effect. However, regardless of whether the wait period has elapsed or not. That is, regardless of whether or not the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the start operation is started, the bet-corresponding effect may be switched based on the start operation during the bet process effect.

(5) In the pseudo bet effect, when the start operation is performed during the bet process effect, the mode for limiting the bet process effect is not limited to the above. For example, the betting process effect may be interrupted based on the start operation, and the bet process effect may be restarted after the start effect or the like based on the start operation is completed. In this case, the betting process effect may be restarted from the interrupted point, or the bet process effect may be restarted from the beginning. Further, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the output volume of the bet sound effect may be lowered, or the brightness of the lighting effect may be lowered.

(6) In the pseudo bet effect, if the start operation is performed during the bet process effect, whether or not to limit the bet process effect is determined based on the executed bet process effect and the remaining bet process effect. It may be configured to be used. For example, if the amount of data and the execution time of the remaining betting process production are less than the predetermined amount, even if the start operation is performed during the betting process production, the betting process production is continued without interruption, and the remaining betting process is continued. If the amount of data and the execution time of the effect are longer than a predetermined value, the bet process effect may be interrupted. More specifically, for example, in performing a bet process effect corresponding to 3 bets, if the start operation is performed at the timing when the bet process effect up to 2 bets is completed, the bet process effect is not interrupted. If the start operation is performed at the timing when the bet process effect up to 1 bet is completed, the bet process effect may be interrupted and switched to the bet compatible effect of 3 bets. .. Further, when the start operation is performed during the waiting time between bets, the betting process production may be interrupted or continued according to the elapsed state of the waiting time, and the waiting time may be determined. If is less than a predetermined time, it may be continued, but if the waiting time is longer than a predetermined time, it may be interrupted.

(7) In the pseudo bet effect, a start operation is performed during the bet process effect, and in a configuration in which the bet process effect is interrupted and switched to the bet-compatible effect, the start operation is performed during the waiting time between bets. In this case, the configuration is such that the bet-compatible effect is switched to without waiting for the elapse of the waiting time, but the bet-compatible effect may be switched after the elapse of the waiting time. Specifically, for example, in the case of performing a 3-bet betting process effect, after the first bet display unit 34a is turned on, the waiting time until the second bet display unit 34b is turned on is in progress. When the start operation is performed, the second bet display unit 34b and the third bet display unit 34c are turned on when the waiting time until the second bet display unit 34b is turned on has elapsed. May be good.

(8) In the pseudo bet effect, when a start operation is performed during the bet process effect, not only the process of limiting the bet process effect and the process of limiting the start effect, but also another process is executed. good. For example, it may be configured to execute a process of measuring the number of times the start operation is performed during the bet process effect. In this case, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like may perform the process according to the number of start operations during the bet process effect. It may be configured to execute a predetermined effect. The predetermined effect may be, for example, a production that congratulates the player on the speed of operation, or conversely, a content that alerts the player that an erroneous operation is likely to occur. There may be.

(9) In the pseudo bet effect, when the start operation is performed during the bet process effect, the mode in which the bet process effect is restricted may be different depending on the progress of the bet process effect. Specifically, when the start operation is performed at the first timing before the completion of the betting process effect, as the first limiting mode, for example, the bet is dealt with at the first timing. When the bet process effect is switched to the effect and the start operation is performed at the second timing, which is before the completion of the bet process effect and is later than the first timing, the second restriction mode is, for example, a lighting effect. May be continued but may limit the output of bet sound effects.

(10) In the re-game setting process on the main control device 101 side, the BET display unit 75 is temporarily turned off, but it may be configured not to go through the turned-off state. In this case, especially in the re-game setting process based on the specific re-game result winning, the BET display unit 75 is maintained in the lit state.

(11) In the re-game setting process based on the specific re-game result winning, a waiting time between bets is provided as in the normal re-game result winning, and the first BET display unit 75a, the second BET display unit 75b, and the third BET display are provided. The unit 75c may be sequentially turned on. In this case, the waiting time between bets in the case of winning a normal replay result and the waiting time between bets in the case of winning a specific replay result may be the same time or different times. In the case of the normal re-game result, the waiting time may be longer or shorter than in the case of the specific re-game result. However, it is preferable that the bet is completed when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a pseudo manner based on the specific re-game result winning, and in this case, the specific re-game is more than the case of the normal re-game result. It is preferable that the result has a shorter waiting time between bets. In addition, in the normal re-game bet effect setting process, the waiting time between bets is set to be the same as the waiting time between bets in the case of a specific re-game winning, by not providing a waiting time between bets. May be good.

(12) In the specific re-game bet effect setting process, the process proceeds after the bet on the main control device 101 side is completed, but the process proceeds without waiting for the completion of the bet on the main control device 101 side. It may be configured to be used. In this case, even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated immediately after winning the specific replay result, the bet on the main control device 101 side is earlier than the pseudo bet effect on the display control device 81 side. It's a good idea to complete it.

(13) Although the pseudo-bet effect is performed by the bet display unit 34 and the speaker 64 on the display control device 81 side, the pseudo-bet effect may be performed by the BET display unit 75 on the main control device 101 side.

(14) The first credit lamp 56b is configured to be controlled by the display control device 81, but may be configured to be controlled by the main control device 101. Further, the bet display unit 34 and the speaker 64 may also be configured to be controlled by the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 may execute a process for performing a pseudo bet effect or the like.

(15) If the trigger of the re-gaming state is the specific re-gaming result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on or the pseudo-bet effect is performed. However, if the conditions for performing the pseudo-bet effect in the re-game state are different. You may let me.

For example, as an AT mode start game, if a second replay result prize or a third replay result prize is established, a pseudo bet effect or the like is performed, but even in the AT mode start game, the first replay result prize is won. If is satisfied, the configuration in which the pseudo-bet effect or the like is not performed may be changed, and if the AT mode start game is used, the pseudo-bet effect or the like may be performed regardless of the replay result winning.

Further, if the end game of the AT mode is one of the replay result winnings, a pseudo bet effect may be performed, or a so-called RT state in which the winning probability of the replay result is improved is provided and the transition to the RT state is provided. It may be configured to perform a pseudo bet effect or the like after the result of the replay that won the prize in the game or the end game.

Furthermore, even after winning the specific re-game result, a pseudo-bet effect is produced according to the number of remaining games in the AT mode, the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games in the advantageous section, and the remaining number of games up to the maximum number of increased number in the advantageous section. Etc. may be executed differently, and when the number of remaining games in AT mode is more than the predetermined number of games, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games, or in the advantageous section. If the remaining number of cards to be increased up to the upper limit is less than or equal to the predetermined number of cards, the pseudo-bet effect or the like may not be performed even after winning the specific replay result.

(16) When the start operation is performed during the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect, whether or not to limit the bet process effect may be different depending on the trigger and the situation of the pseudo bet effect.

For example, as an AT mode start game, when the second replay result winning or the third replay result winning is established, the betting process production is restricted when the start operation is performed during the betting process production in the pseudo bet production. However, even in the AT mode start game, if a pseudo bet effect or the like is performed based on the first replay result winning, the bet is made even if the start operation is performed during the bet process effect. The configuration may be such that the process production is not restricted.

Further, although the bet process effect is restricted when the start operation is performed during the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect of the end game of the AT mode, the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect is being produced in the middle of the AT mode. The betting process effect may not be restricted when the start operation is performed.

Furthermore, even after winning the specific re-game result, a pseudo-bet effect is produced according to the number of remaining games in the AT mode, the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games in the advantageous section, and the remaining number of games up to the maximum number of increased number in the advantageous section. It is possible to make a difference whether or not to limit the betting process production when the start operation is performed during the betting process production in the above, and when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is equal to or more than the predetermined number of games or the upper limit game of the advantageous section. When the number of remaining games up to the number is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games, or when the number of remaining games up to the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is less than or equal to the predetermined number, the start operation is performed during the betting process production in the pseudo bet production. The betting process effect may not be restricted when it is performed, and vice versa.

(17) The first credit insertion switch 56 has a built-in first credit lamp 56 so that the first credit insertion switch 56 itself lights up. However, the first credit lamp 56 is provided around the first credit insertion switch 56. The surroundings of the first credit insertion switch 56 may be turned on to prompt the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, or the auxiliary display unit 65 may operate the first credit insertion switch 56. By performing the first state (for example, displaying "PUSH") to be prompted and operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the display of the first state is terminated and the second state (displaying "PUSU" above) is displayed. It may be configured to switch to the non-functioning state). Then, by setting these to the lighting state or the first state, the start of the pseudo-bet effect or the like may be promoted.

(18) Although the first credit lamp 56b is provided to encourage the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the notification means corresponding to the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion slot 45 may also be provided. When the means is in the first state, the bet number can be operated by the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion slot 45, and in the second state, the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion slot 45 can be operated. It may be configured to notify that it is not possible. Then, by setting these notification means in the first state, the start of the pseudo-bet effect or the like may be promoted.

(19) Although the waiting time (interval) between bets is different in the re-game bet production and the continuous bet production, the waiting time between the bets in the re-game bet production and the continuous bet production may be the same length. The waiting time in the bet effect may be longer than the waiting time in the replay bet effect. The waiting time between bets in the pseudo-bet effect is also set to the same time as the waiting time in the continuous bet effect, or the same time as the waiting time in the replay bet effect before the lapse of the wait period. It may be shorter or longer than the waiting time in the production, or it may be shorter or longer than the waiting time in the replay bet production.

(20) Even in the bet process production in the re-game bet production based on the normal re-game result and the continuous bet production after the small winning combination result or the loss result, if the start operation is performed during the betting process production, the betting process production is performed. May be configured to limit. In particular, when a predetermined start effect (for example, push order notification effect) is performed based on the start operation, it is considered highly significant to limit the bet process effect (for example, switch to a bet-compatible effect).

(21) When the push order notification effect and the bet process effect overlap as the start effect based on the start operation, the push order notification effect side is restricted or the bet process effect side is restricted, but the main control The push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 on the device 101 side may also be restricted.

(22) When the start operation is performed during the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect and the push order notification effect is performed based on the start operation, the start of the push order notification effect is delayed, but in the game, the start operation is delayed. The push order notification effect may not be executed. For example, when the AT mode is set to the navigation count management type AT mode in which the push order notification effect is specified by the number of executions of the push order notification effect instead of the number of games, and the push order notification effect is not executed in the game, the game is concerned. It is preferable that the push order notification effect that was planned to be executed in is not counted in the number of executions, and the remaining number of executions of the push order notification effect is not subtracted.

(23) When the start operation is performed during the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect and the push order notification effect is performed based on the start operation, the start of the push order notification effect is delayed, but the push order notification is performed. The configuration may be such that the execution mode of the effect is different. For example, in the normal state, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified by a yellow number as the first execution mode, but when the start operation is performed during the bet process production in the pseudo bet production, the second execution mode is used. The operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be notified by a purple number. In this case, the push order notification effect according to the second execution mode may be configured to be executed only when the start operation is performed during the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect, or during the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect. It may be configured to be executed not only when the start operation is performed but also in other cases. As another case, for example, when the number of remaining sets in the AT mode is a predetermined number or more, the push order notification effect according to the second execution mode may be executed.

(24) The mode of the betting process effect in the pseudo-bet effect is different between before and after the lapse of the wait period, but the mode of the bet process effect in the replay bet effect and the continuous bet effect is the mode of the wait period. The configuration may be different between before and after the lapse.

(25) In the configuration in which the mode of the betting process effect is different before and after the lapse of the wait period, not only the waiting time between the bets may be different, but also other production modes may be different. For example, the type of sound effect at the time of betting of the betting process effect may be different between before and after the lapse of the wait period, or the function of the bet display unit 34 may be carried by the auxiliary display unit 65, and the auxiliary display may be performed. The display mode of the number of bets displayed in the unit 65 may be different between before and after the lapse of the wait period.

(26) In the configuration in which the standby state is not set in the re-game state, the first credit lamp 56 is turned off from the on state when the second transition period that can be set in the standby state even in the re-game state has elapsed. It may be configured to switch to. In this case, in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off after the second transition period elapses.

(27) When the standby state is set, the BET display unit 75 and the game status display unit 76 managed on the main control device 101 side are not set to the standby state, while the bet display unit 34 and the first bet display unit 34 managed on the display control device 81 side. The credit lamp 56b, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the speaker 64 may be in a standby state, or vice versa.

(28) The lottery result of each game in the so-called RT state in which the winning probability of the re-game result is improved may be defined as the re-game result. In this case, the lottery result of each game in the RT state may be expressed as a specific result, and the specific result may include the first re-game, the second re-game, and the like. Further, the RT state may be defined as a replay state.

(29) The BET display unit 75 and the game status display unit 75 may be provided at a position different from that of the game panel 25. For example, the BET display unit 75 or the game state display unit 75 may be provided on the surface below the game panel 25 where the first credit input switch 56 and the effect switch 66 intersecting the game panel 25 are provided. Further, it may be configured to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, the display control device 81 may be responsible for controlling the BET display unit 75 and the game state display unit 75, or the main control device 101 may be responsible for controlling the auxiliary display unit 65.

(30) The first transition period until the transition to the temporary standby state is set to a shorter period than the second transition period until the transition to the standby state, but the first transition period is longer than the second transition period. It may be set to be a long period, or the first transition period and the second transition period may be set to be the same period.

(31) The re-game status display unit 76a is configured to continue the lighting state even when it is in the standby state, but it may be configured to switch to the off state when it is in the standby state or the temporary standby state. The startable status display unit 76b and the acceptable status display unit 76c are configured to switch to the off state when the standby state is entered, but may be configured to switch to the off state when the temporary standby state is entered, or to be in the standby state. It may be configured so that it does not switch to the off state at that time.

(32) In the re-game state based on the specific re-game result, when the clearing switch 59 is operated, the credit may be settled and the lighting state of the first credit lamp 56b may be maintained. That is, the configuration may be based on a clearing operation in which the clearing of credits and the execution of the pseudo-bet effect are different.

(33) In the re-game state based on the specific re-game result, when the clearing switch 59 is operated, the credit is settled, a pseudo-bet effect is performed, and then the first credit lamp 56b is turned on. It may be configured as. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b may not be turned off at the start of the pseudo bet effect and may be maintained in the lit state, or the first credit lamp 56b may be turned off at the start of the pseudo bet effect. After that (for example, after switching to the bet-corresponding effect in the pseudo-bet effect), the first credit lamp 56b may be switched to the lit state.

(34) In the continuous bet effect, the bet sound effect may not be output. In this case, the re-game bet effect may be configured to output the bet sound effect, and the re-game bet effect may be configured not to output the bet sound effect. In a configuration in which an effect equivalent to a re-game bet effect is performed before the lapse of the wait period, and an effect equivalent to a continuous bet effect is performed after the lapse of the wait period, a replay with a bet sound effect is performed before the lapse of the wait period. While the effect equivalent to the game bet effect is performed, the effect equivalent to the continuous bet effect without the bet sound effect may be performed after the wait period has elapsed.

(35) The mode of the pseudo bet effect based on the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 and the pseudo bet effect when the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 may be different.

(36) The configuration is such that when the betting process effect and the start time effect or the freeze effect overlap, either one is restricted, but the overlap with the start time effect or the freeze effect is not limited to the bet process effect, and any bet is made. Any betting effect may be performed based on several operations.

(37) In the normal re-game bet effect setting process, the bet process effect is advanced each time a re-game bet command is received from the main control device 101, but the display control device does not use the re-game bet command. A timer counter or the like may be used on the 81 side to specify the interval between bets, and then the bet process effect may be advanced. Further, in the re-game bet effect, only the bet-corresponding effect may be performed without performing the bet process effect. In this case, the bet corresponding effect on the display control device 81 side is performed after the bet in the re-game setting process on the main control device 101 side is completed, so that the bet is not completed even though the bet is not completed. However, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the start operation is performed.

(38) When the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the freeze effect is generated to delay the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, but the wait period is extended and each reel 32L, It may be configured to delay the start of rotation of 32M and 32R. Further, in the freeze effect, the explanation was made on the premise that the display effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, but the display effect is not performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, and the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is simply delayed. It may be configured as a reel. Further, the period for delaying the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be different depending on the remaining period of the betting process effect, specifically, the remaining period of the betting process effect may be the first period. For example, if the start of rotation is delayed over the first period or a period obtained by adding a predetermined period to the first period, and the remaining period of the betting process effect is longer than the first period, the start of rotation is set to the second period. It may be configured to be delayed over two periods or a period obtained by adding a predetermined period to the second period. It should be noted that the delay period may be different depending on the remaining effect amount (the number of remaining bets and the remaining number of lights) instead of the remaining period of the bet process effect.

(38) The ball ejection rate is changed according to each set value, and the setting 1 is configured to have the lowest ball ejection rate and the setting 6 is configured to have the highest ball ejection rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase / decrease and the mode of increase / decrease of are changed. For example, the payout rates of some of the set values may be the same, such as the payout rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2, but the payout rates of the other set values may be different. Further, the settings 1, 3 and 5 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is high, and the settings 2, 4 and 6 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is low. In addition, in the settings 1 and 5, the amount of balls ejected increases in a short time and the amount of balls ejected decreases in a long time, and in the settings 2, 3 and 4, it takes longer than the settings 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The decrease in a predetermined amount may be shorter than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured such that the increase or decrease of the ball output hardly occurs. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(39) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, a reel and five corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to one line in the situation where the number of bets is three has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be five lines.

(40) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball throwing and ball paying out function such as a pachinko machine (so-called ball-using rotating cylinder type gaming machine) may be used. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The pachinko machine has, for example, a variable ball-entry means that can switch between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter or cannot enter than the open state. In a configuration in which a round game in which the variable ball entry means is opened when the lottery is won shifts to a hit state in which the round game can be executed multiple times, the game ball entered in the variable ball entry means passes through the specific passing portion. (Occurrence of V winning), the gaming state after the hit state shifts to an advantageous state such that the winning probability of the predetermined winning / failing determination is increased, and the gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through a specific state. If the game does not pass through the section (non-occurrence of V winning), the gaming state after the winning state shifts to a non-advantageous state such that the winning probability of the predetermined winning / failing determination is lower than that in the advantageous state. It is also possible to apply each of the above inventions to sex. In this case, the result notification of the passage determination as to whether or not the passage is passed is executed during the round game in which the passage determination is made, and the round after the round game in which the passage determination is made. By providing a case of executing in a game, it is possible to increase the degree of attention not only to the round game in which the passing judgment is made but also to the subsequent round games by utilizing the psychology of the player who wants to know the result of the passing judgment. It will be possible. Further, there are cases where the result notification of the passage determination is executed during the round game in which the passage determination is made, and cases where the result notification is executed in the round game after the round game in which the passage determination is made. By standardizing the modes and the period from the passage determination to the execution of the result notification, whether the notification is performed across the round games depending on the production mode and the period until the result notification. Whether or not it is difficult to specify, and it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict the result of the passage determination.

(41) In the above embodiment, a gaming machine of a type in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game is exemplified by inserting a medal as a game medium and setting the number of bets to start the game. However, this does not deny a medalless type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a virtual gaming medium (predetermined gaming value) can be used to set the number of bets on the game so that the game can be started, and the above-mentioned privilege corresponding to the winning of the game is described above. It is preferable to use a configuration in which a virtual game medium (predetermined game value) corresponding to a predetermined number of medals is given. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or the information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the above-mentioned pachinko machine may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which the game balls are paid out, but also an enclosed type pachinko machine in which the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, it may be configured to notify information indicating the number of prize balls.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A bet number operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) in which a bet number operation for setting a game bet number is performed,
Based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, the bet number setting means (medal insertion correspondence process, first operation correspondence processing, second operation correspondence processing, etc. by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game is executed. Function) and
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player according to a bet number set by the bet number setting means based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101). When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
After executing the specific notification (bet process effect) when the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed, the bet number correspondence notification (bet correspondence effect) corresponding to the bet number set based on the bet number operation. The bet number notification means (function to execute the bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81), which is executed by the specific notification means (bet display unit 34), and
When the start operation means is operated in the specific situation in which the specific notification is executed, the specific processing means (specified by the display control device 81) that executes the specific processing that can limit the executed specific notification. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a process such as switching to a bet-compatible effect based on a start operation command in the re-game bet effect setting process).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In the so-called slot machine gaming machine to which the privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, the bet number is set when the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed, and the bet corresponding to the set bet number is set through the specific notification. Number correspondence notification is performed. Therefore, in addition to being able to grasp the bet number set based on one's own bet number operation by the bet number correspondence notification, it is also possible to grasp that the bet number operation has been accepted by the specific notification, and unnecessary betting. It is possible to prevent a number of operations from being performed.

However, in this case, for example, the starting operation means may be operated during the execution of the specific notification and before the bet number correspondence notification is performed, and the rotation of the orbiting body may be started based on the operation. Assumed, in such a case, there is a high possibility that the effect and process for starting the rotation of the orbiting body overlap with the process for specific notification and specific notification, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase, or the effect, etc. It may cause confusion for the player due to the duplication of.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, the specific processing means for executing the specific processing that can limit the specific notification during the execution is provided. The overlap between the effect for starting rotation and the specific notification, and the overlap between the process for starting rotation and the processing for specific notification are eliminated, and it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably advancing the game.

Feature A2. The specific processing means is characterized in that it can execute a specific process for limiting the execution of at least a part of the specific notification based on the operation of the start operation means in the specific situation. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated under a specific situation during which the specific notification is being executed, the execution of at least a part of the specific notification is restricted, so that the start operation means is restricted. It becomes possible to eliminate the duplication with the start notification executed based on the operation of, and it is possible to suitably avoid the event that the player is confused by the duplication of both notifications.

Feature A3. The specific notification is configured to include a first specific notification (lighting effect by the bet display unit 34) and a second specific notification (bet time sound effect).
The specific processing means limits the execution of the first specific notification of the specific notifications based on the operation of the start operation means in the specific situation, while the execution of the second specific notification of the specific notifications. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that the specific process can be executed as permitted.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature A2, and in particular, the execution of the first specific notification is restricted as a configuration for restricting at least a part of the notification, while the specific processing is performed so as to allow the execution of the second specific notification. By configuring it, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in processing load due to limiting the execution of all specific notifications, and it is difficult to give a sense of discomfort by stopping the specific notification that has been executed halfway. Is also possible.

The above configuration is limited to a configuration such as "the first specific notification has a larger amount of data to be executed or the processing load of the processing to execute is larger than the second specific notification". Therefore, the significance of limiting the execution of the first specific notification is further enhanced. As a specific configuration of such a configuration, a configuration in which "the first specific notification is a predetermined display effect and the second specific notification is a predetermined sound effect" can be considered.

On the contrary, when the configuration such as "the amount of data to be executed is larger or the processing load of the processing to be executed is larger in the second specific notification than in the first specific notification" is already limited. It is also possible to eliminate the waste of stopping the set second specific notification, and in this case, "the amount of data already set in the second specific notification is larger than that in the first specific notification". It may be expressed as a configuration such as "there is a large amount of data, or the processing load of the executed processing is large".

Feature A4. The bet number notification means executes the bet number correspondence notification in the same manner as when the restriction is not applied even when the specific notification is restricted by the specific processing by the specific processing means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that it is possible (for example, see FIG. 74 (d)).

According to the above configuration, although the specific notification is restricted based on the operation of the starting operation means, it is not necessary to change the mode of the bet number correspondence notification regardless of the presence or absence of the restriction. This makes it possible to avoid an increase in processing load due to duplication of processing with a relatively simple configuration.

In addition, the above-mentioned "same mode" may be not only the completely same mode but also a different mode to the extent that it is difficult or impossible for the player to discriminate.

Further, the above "same mode" may be expressed as "same timing", and by doing so, it is not necessary to change even the execution start timing of the bet number correspondence notification, and the processing load is further reduced. It becomes possible to plan.

Feature A5. The bet number notification means can execute the bet number correspondence notification based on the limitation of the specific notification by the specific processing by the specific processing means (for example, FIG. 74 (b). ). The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is restricted based on the operation of the starting operation means, the notification is switched to the bet number corresponding notification. Therefore, even though the rotation of each orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, it is possible to prevent a blank period in which the bet number is unknown.

Feature A6. The specific notification includes a first specific notification (lighting effect by the bet display unit 34) by the first notification unit (bet display unit 34) and a second notification unit (speaker 64) different from the first notification unit. It is a configuration that is executed including specific notification (sound effect at the time of betting).
The bet number notification means executes the bet number correspondence notification in the first notification unit.
The specific processing means limits the execution of the first specific notification of the specific notifications based on the operation of the start operation means in the specific situation, while the execution of the second specific notification of the specific notifications. The gaming machine according to the feature A5, characterized in that the specific process is executed as permissible.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid an increase in the processing load by restricting the execution of all specific notifications, and it is difficult to give a sense of discomfort by stopping the specific notification that has been executed halfway. Is also possible. Then, especially on the premise that the bet number correspondence notification is performed in the first notification unit, the first specific notification in the first notification unit is restricted and switched to the bet number correspondence notification. It is possible to prevent a blank period in which the bet number is not notified by the notification unit.

Feature A7. When the start drive control is performed by the drive control means based on the operation of the start operation means, the start notification means (display) capable of executing the start notification (push order notification effect, specific combination notification effect, etc.) by the predetermined notification means. It is equipped with a function to execute the start effect setting process by the control device 81).
The specific processing means executes the specific processing when a predetermined start notification (push order notification effect) is performed by the start notification means based on the operation of the start operation means in the specific situation, while the start is performed. It is possible to prevent the specific process from being executed when the predetermined start notification by the notification means is not performed or when the predetermined start notification by the start notification means and the specific notification do not overlap (for example). , FIG. 78). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6.

According to the above configuration, when the start notification as an effect at the start of rotation of the orbiting body and the specific notification overlap, the specific processing that can limit the specific notification is performed, but the start notification is not executed. If the start notification and the specific notification do not overlap, the specific process is not executed. With such a configuration, even if the specific processing is for avoiding duplication of notifications, the specific processing will not be performed in unnecessary situations where the notifications do not overlap in the first place. , It becomes possible to contribute to the reduction of the processing load.

Feature A8. From the start of the start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses, the start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control (the wait time in the rotation start process by the main control device 101 elapses). (Function to execute the process of waiting for the start of rotation) and
When the start operation means is operated in the specific situation before the lapse of the specific period, the permissible means (specific replay bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of permitting the execution of the specific notification. A function that executes a process to prevent switching to a bet-compatible effect in the start operation during the wait period in
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7, characterized in that
According to the above configuration, since the start drive control and the start drive control are for a specific period or longer, the number of games that can be executed per unit time is limited, and the games can be optimized. In such a configuration in which a specific period is set and a so-called weight is defined, when the bet number correspondence notification is performed via the specific notification based on the bet number operation before the lapse of the specific period, the start operation is performed during the specific notification. Even if the means is operated, the execution of the start drive control is restricted before the lapse of a specific period, so that the rotation of the orbiting body is not started based on the operation of the start operation means. Therefore, in such a case, the inconvenience shown in the feature A1 such that the notification and processing for starting rotation and the processing for specific notification and specific notification overlap, or even if they occur, the degree of inconvenience does not occur. It is highly likely that it is low, and it is considered that there is little need to limit specific notifications. Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from being restricted even in an unnecessary scene by providing an allowable means capable of allowing the execution of the specific notification. , It is possible to optimize the game production without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Feature A9. From the start of the start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses, the start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control (the wait time in the rotation start process by the main control device 101 elapses). Equipped with a function to execute the process of waiting for the start of rotation)
The specific processing means is a case where the start operation means is operated in the specific situation before the specific period elapses, and the start drive control based on the operation of the start operation means is executed in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the specific processing can be executed so that the specific notification can be restricted when the start drive control is performed.

According to the above configuration, since the start drive control and the start drive control are for a specific period or longer, the number of games that can be executed per unit time is limited, and the games can be optimized. In such a configuration in which a specific period is set and a so-called weight is defined, when the bet number correspondence notification is performed via the specific notification based on the bet number operation before the lapse of the specific period, the start operation is performed during the specific notification. Even if the means is operated, the execution of the start drive control is restricted before the lapse of a specific period, but the start drive control based on the operation of the start operation means may be executed based on the lapse of the specific period. There is a possibility that the specific notification has not been completed yet at the timing when the start drive control is performed. In that respect, in the above configuration, in such a situation, since the specific processing is executed so that the specific notification is restricted when the start drive control is performed, the specific processing is performed in an unnecessary scene. It is possible to limit the specific notification while executing the above, and it is possible to enhance the effectiveness of the specific processing.

Feature A10. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a re-game result and the pattern combination corresponding to the re-game result is stopped at the effective position, the number of bets on which the lottery by the lottery means which is the re-game result is performed. In the re-game state in which the same number of bets as the above is set, the re-game setting means (process for re-game setting by the main control device 101) that executes the re-game process that enables the lottery by the lottery means to be received again. Has the ability to execute)
When the re-game process is performed based on the specific re-game result (specific re-game result), the bet number notification means executes the specific notification based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means. , A specific bet number notification means (a function of executing a specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game process. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized in that it is present.

According to the above configuration, when a winning of a specific re-game result is established and the re-game process is performed, the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game process is the bet number operation means. It is based on the bet number operation. Moreover, even in this case, since the specific notification is performed before the bet number correspondence notification, the notification mode is the same as when the bet number is set by the bet number setting means based on the normal bet number operation. Will be. By doing so, even if it is a re-game result in which the re-game process is performed, it becomes possible to proceed with the game in the same flow as the game after the other small role result or the out-of-game result, which makes the game feel uncomfortable. By using the fact that it is possible to proceed with the game without any problem and give the player the impression that it is not the result of the re-game, for example, a specific re-game result is treated in the same way as other small role results or out-of-game results. It is possible to enhance the effect of giving a certain impression, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Regarding the "re-game result", "as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, it is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again with the same number of bets as the number of bets this time by the privilege granting means. It may be defined as "re-gambling result to which re-gambling is given", and this point is the same for "re-gambling result" in other features and other feature groups.

Further, in the above configuration, the above effect is further clarified by limiting the small winning combination result and the deviation result as follows. This point can also be applied when clarifying the relationship with the "replay result" in other features or other feature groups.

"As a lottery result by the lottery means, a small winning combination result (for example, a small winning combination result) to which a predetermined number of game values are given is set as a privilege by the privilege granting means.
The bet number notification means is the specific notification based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means in the next game after a predetermined number of game values are given by the privilege granting means based on the small winning combination result. After executing, the configuration of "execution of the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set based on the bet number operation" and "the loss result is set as the lottery result by the lottery means".
In the next game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the deviation, the bet number notification means performs the specific notification based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, and then performs the bet number operation. Executes the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set based on the "configuration."

Feature A11. When the re-game process is performed based on a predetermined re-game result (normal re-game result) different from the specific re-game result, the bet number notification means performs a bet number operation of the bet number operation means. A predetermined bet number notification means (a function of executing a normal re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) that can execute the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game process without intervention. The gaming machine according to feature A10, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the peculiarity of the bet number correspondence notification being performed via the bet number operation in the case of a specific replay result is clarified. That is, like a predetermined re-game result, normally, the bet number correspondence notification is performed without going through the bet number operation, but if it is a specific re-game result, the bet number is performed by going through the bet number operation. It is clarified that the response notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that a specific re-game result is not a kind of re-game result such as a predetermined re-game result, but is treated in the same way as other small role results or out-of-game results. , The game can be diversified by using it, and in order to diversify the game in this way, there is a possibility that the starting operation means is operated under a specific situation as described in the feature A1. Therefore, the significance of providing a specific processing means for executing a specific process capable of limiting the specific notification is greatly enhanced.

Feature A12. The predetermined bet number notification means is configured to execute the bet number correspondence notification without executing the specific notification, or to execute the bet number correspondence notification after executing a predetermined notification different from the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that it is.

According to the above configuration, not only the presence / absence of the bet number operation but also the notification mode until the bet number correspondence notification is performed differs between the case of the predetermined re-game result and the case of the specific re-game result. In this case, since the specific re-game result is common to the notification mode of other small winning combination results and out-of-game results, the specific re-game result is like a predetermined re-game result by adopting the above configuration. It is possible to help give the impression that it is treated the same as other small role results and missed results, not the replay result.

Feature A13. When the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed, the bet number notification corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means is notified by a predetermined notification means (BET display) different from the specific notification means. A second bet number notification means (a function of executing BET processing by the main control device 101) executed by the unit 75) is provided.
When the re-game processing is performed by the re-game setting means, the second bet number notification means goes through the bet number operation regardless of the type of the re-game result that triggered the re-game processing. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A10 to A12, which is characterized in that the bet number notification can be executed without any problem.

According to the above configuration, when the re-game process based on the specific re-game result is performed, the bet number correspondence notification is performed based on the bet number operation, and the bet number notification on the second bet number notification means side is performed. Is performed without going through the bet number operation regardless of the type of replay result. By doing so, the specific re-game result is a kind of re-game result while giving the impression that the specific re-game result is treated the same as other small winning combination results and out-of-game results through the bet number correspondence notification. If you try to confirm that, it will be possible to do so, for example, cheating that causes the re-gambling process to be performed even though it is not the re-gambling result, or a specific re-gambling result is another small role result or a missed result. The manager of the game hall, etc. preferably finds a fraudulent act that tries to enjoy the benefit of a specific re-game result even though it is another small role result, etc. by using the impression that it is treated the same as. It becomes possible.

Not only that, the bet number is set by performing the re-game process, so for a specific re-game result, an originally unnecessary bet number operation is performed in the production, as in the above configuration. If the second bet number notification means is set to perform the bet number notification without going through the bet number operation, the start operation can be performed without going through the bet number operation even after a specific replay result. It is possible to clarify that it is a composition.

Feature A14. The bet number setting means has a configuration in which the bet number can be set up to a predetermined specific number.
The specific notification means has the specific number of notification units (bet display units 34a to 34c), and each notification unit can be switched between a notification state (lighting state) and a non-notification state (light-off state). Has been
The bet number notification means sets the specific notification to sequentially switch the notification unit of the number corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means to the notification state, and the number corresponding to the bet number. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the notification unit executes a state in which the notification unit is switched to the notification state as the bet number corresponding notification.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of bet number correspondence notification and specific notification, and in particular, by sequentially switching the notification unit of the number corresponding to the set bet number to the notification state as the specific notification, for example, the bet number. Even in the bet number operation in which the bet number operations are set one by one, it is possible to clearly grasp that the bet number operation has been accepted by switching the corresponding notification unit to the notification state.

Feature A15. When the specific notification is performed, the bet number notification means switches the predetermined notification unit to the notification state, and after a predetermined period (0.1 sec or 0.2 sec), the next notification unit of the predetermined notification unit is switched to the notification unit. The gaming machine according to feature A14, which is configured to switch to a notification state.

As in the above configuration, if the notification unit is sequentially switched to the notification state at predetermined intervals in the specific notification, the specific notification will be performed for a relatively long period of time depending on the number of bets. As a result, an event in which the starting operation means is operated during the specific notification is likely to occur, and the significance of providing the specific processing means of the feature A1 is further enhanced.

Feature A16. In the privilege granting means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-gambling result and the pattern combination corresponding to the re-gambling result is stopped at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the re-gambling result is the replay. It is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again in the re-gambling state in which the same number of bets as the number of bets made by the lottery means as the game result is set by the bet number setting means. It is equipped with a re-gambling setting means (a function of executing a re-gambling setting process by the main control device 101) to execute the re-gambling process.
When the re-game process is performed based on the special re-game result (normal rips A to C), the bet number notification means has a special situation in which the special re-game result is obtained. In the case of a situation (for example, an AT start game), the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game process after executing the specific notification based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means. On the other hand, if the situation in which the special re-gaming result (normal rips A to C) is obtained is different from the special situation (for example, the normal gaming state), the bet of the betting number operating means is bet. A special bet number notification means (usually by a display control device 81) capable of executing the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game process after executing the specific notification without going through a number operation. When the second re-gaming result winning or the third re-gaming result winning in the rips A to C is established, the specific re-gaming bet effect setting process is performed, and when the first re-gaming result winning in the normal rips A to C is established. 1 is a gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, which is characterized by having a function of performing a normal re-gaming bet effect setting process).

According to the above configuration, when the winning of the special re-game result is established and the re-game process is performed, the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game process is the special re-game. If the situation in which the winning result is established is a special situation, it is performed based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, while if it is not a special situation, it is performed without going through the bet number operation. In this case, in a special situation, since the specific notification is performed before the bet number correspondence notification, it is the same as the case where the bet number is set by the bet number setting means based on the normal bet number operation. It becomes a notification mode. By doing so, even if the re-game result is to be re-gamed, depending on the situation, it is possible to proceed with the game in the same flow as other small roles or the game after the loss result. , It is possible to optimize the progress of the game, and by using it to give the player an impression that it is not the result of the replay, for example, the effect of making the special replay result look like another small role or a missed result. It is also possible to expect, and it is possible to diversify the game by using the other small roles and the effects that seem to be the result of the loss.

Further, when the above configuration is applied to the feature A10, the feature A11, and other features quoting them, the "special replay result" is either a "specific replay result" or a "predetermined replay result". The result may be the same, or may be different from the "specific replay result" or the "predetermined replay result".

In addition, the above-mentioned "special re-game result" will be won in duplicate with the "specific re-game result" and the "predetermined re-game result", and if it is a special situation, a prize for the specific re-game result will be established. In this way, if it is not a special situation, a prize may be established as a predetermined replay result.

Feature A17. As the gaming state, a first gaming state (normal mode) and a second gaming state (AT mode) different from the first gaming state are set.
The gaming machine according to feature A16, wherein the special situation is a situation in which a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state occurs.

When a special re-gaming result winning occurs in a situation where the game state is changed as in the above configuration, if the bet number correspondence notification is performed based on the bet number operation, the second game state to be changed is the bet number. It is possible to start from the operation, and it is possible to start the second gaming state with a new feeling without inheriting the result of the previous first gaming state.

Feature A18. Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, it is provided with an advantage determination means (for example, a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery process by the main control device 101) that causes an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player.
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a first specific result (specific re-game result) and a second specific result (for example, a normal re-game result) are set.
The advantageous determination means is more likely to cause the advantageous event when the advantageous determination is made based on the first specific result than when the advantageous determination is made based on the second specific result. It is a configuration that tends to result in an advantageous event.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, in the specific situation where the specific notification is executed after the circulation of the orbiting body in the game that resulted in the first specific result is stopped, the said When the start operation means is operated, the specific process is executed, while when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, the orbiting body in the game resulting in the second specific result is rotated. A1 to be characterized in that the configuration is such that the specific process is not executed even when the start operation means is operated in the specific situation in which the specific notification is executed after the specific notification is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of A17.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first specific result is more likely to be more advantageous in the advantageous determination than the second specific result, after the first specific result, when the starting operation means is operated in a specific situation. While the specific notification is restricted, after the second specific result, the specific notification is not restricted even if the starting operation means is operated in the same specific situation. By doing so, for example, a configuration in which the result of the advantage determination is notified based on the operation of the starting operation means, or a situation where the game progress needs to be accelerated so that the result of the advantage determination is advantageous is specified. The notification is likely to be restricted in the middle, and it is possible to preferably avoid the start of rotation of the orbiting body during the specific notification.

Feature A19. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A bet number operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) in which an operation for setting a game bet number is performed, and
When the bet number operation means is operated, the bet number setting means (a function of executing the first operation correspondence process and the second operation correspondence process by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game, and
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player according to a bet number set by the bet number setting means based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101). When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the bet number operating means is operated, after executing the specific notification (bet process effect), the bet number corresponding notification (bet corresponding effect) corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means is predetermined. The bet number notification means (function to execute the bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81) executed by the notification means, and
In the specific situation where the specific notification is executed, when the start operation means is operated, the specific processing means (the start in the specific replay bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) that executes a predetermined specific process. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function to execute processing such as switching to a bet-compatible effect based on an operation command.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of is given, the betting number of the game is set when the betting number operating means is operated, and the betting number corresponding to the betting number of the game is supported through specific notification. The notification is performed by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is assumed that the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, and the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation. There is a high possibility that the production and processing overlap with the processing for specific notification and specific notification, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase, or the duplication of production and the like may cause confusion for the player.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, the specific processing means for executing the specific processing is provided, so that the specific processing can be performed, for example, the rotation start. By setting it as a process for eliminating the overlap between the effect for the purpose and the specific notification, and the process for starting the rotation and the process for the specific notification, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably advancing the game.

The configurations limited to the features A1 to A18 may be applied individually to the feature A19, or may be applied in combination. Further, some of the configurations limited by the features A1 to A18 may be applied, or they may be applied in combination.

Feature A20. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A bet number operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) in which an operation for setting a game bet number is performed, and
When the bet number operation means is operated, the bet number setting means (a function of executing the first operation correspondence process and the second operation correspondence process by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game, and
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player according to a bet number set by the bet number setting means based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101). When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the bet number operating means is operated, after executing the specific notification (bet process effect), the bet number corresponding notification (bet corresponding effect) corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means is predetermined. The bet number notification means (function to execute the bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81) executed by the notification means, and
When the rotation of each orbiting body is started by the drive control means, the start notification means (start time effect setting process by the display control device 81) that executes the start notification by the specific notification means or a notification means different from the specific notification means. Function to execute) and
Specific processing means (display control device) that executes specific processing capable of limiting either the specific notification or the start notification when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a process of switching to a bet-compatible effect based on a start operation command in the specific re-game bet effect setting process according to 81, a process of delaying the start of a push order notification effect, and the like). ..

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of is given, the betting number of the game is set when the betting number operating means is operated, and the betting number corresponding to the betting number of the game is supported through specific notification. The notification is performed by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is assumed that the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, and the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation. There is a high possibility that the start notification and processing will overlap with the processing for specific notification and specific notification, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase, and there is a possibility that the player will be confused due to duplication of production and the like. ..

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, the specific processing means for executing the specific processing capable of limiting the specific notification or the start notification is provided. It is possible to eliminate the overlap between the notification and the specific notification, and the overlap between the start notification process and the specific notification process. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably advancing the game.

The configurations limited to the features A1 to A18 may be applied individually to the feature A20, or may be applied in combination. Further, some of the configurations limited by the features A1 to A18 may be applied, or they may be applied in combination.

The invention described in the above features A1 to A20 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. It is known that the player is given a privilege according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the start lever is placed in a situation where a medal as a game value is bet on a slot machine. When operated, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technique that "if it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "the game illustrated above here, etc." It is necessary to make the game progress more suitable for the machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features A1 to A20, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A bet number operation means (first credit insertion switch 56) in which an operation for setting a game bet number is performed, and
When the bet number operation means is operated, the bet number setting means (a function of executing the first operation corresponding process by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game, and
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player according to a bet number set by the bet number setting means based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101). When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, it is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again in the re-gaming state in which the same number of bets as the number of bets made by the lottery means is set. The re-gambling result is set,
An operation notification means (first credit lamp 56b) provided for the bet number operation means and capable of switching between a first notification state (lighting state) and a second notification state (light-off state).
A first control means (a function of the display control device 81 to execute a process of turning on the first credit lamp 56b) and the operation notification means for setting the operation notification means to the first notification state.
When the operation of the bet number operation means is performed in the situation where the operation notification means is in the first notification state, the second control means (display control device 81) switches the operation notification means to the second notification state. Function to execute the continuous bet effect setting process) and
When the re-game result that triggered the setting of the re-game state is a predetermined re-game result, the operation notification means is not set to the first notification state in the re-game state, while the re-game state is set. If the re-game result that triggered the setting is a specific re-game result different from the predetermined re-game result, the operation notification means is set to the first notification state in the re-game state. Means (a function to execute a specific replay bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) and
The first notification state of the operation notification means set when the result of the specific re-game is maintained for a specific period, and when the specific period elapses, the operation notification means is moved to the second notification state. 4th control means (a function to execute standby processing by the display control device 81) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the bet number of the game is set based on the operation of the bet number operation means, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the lottery according to the set bet number is performed and stopped. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of the lottery is given when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at an effective position based on the operation of the operation means, the operation notification is given to the betting number operation means. When the means is provided and the bet number can be set by the operation of the bet number operation means, the first notification state is set, and when the operation is performed in the first notification state, the first notification state is changed to the first. 2 Since the game is switched to the notification state, the player knows that the operation of the bet number operation means is required to start the game and that the operation is accepted when the bet number operation means is operated. Is easier to understand.

In this case, as a lottery result, a re-gaming result is set so that the lottery can be received again with the same number of bets, and after the re-game result, it is not necessary to set a new bet number. However, in the above configuration, if it is a predetermined re-game result, the operation notification means is not set to the first notification state in order to clarify that it is not necessary to set a new bet number, but if it is a specific re-game result. , The operation notification means is set to the first notification state so as to prompt the operation of the bet number operation means, and by doing so, the specific replay result can be regarded as if it is another small role result or a missed result. It is possible to give the player the impression that they are treated in the same way.

However, these predetermined re-game results and specific re-game results are only re-game results. For example, if the game is terminated with these re-game result winnings established, a new bet number is set. Although it is possible to play at least once without doing it, it will be abandoned. In addition, if the game hall is closed and the game can be played on the next day without the need to set a new bet number, it is assumed that the state in which the previous day's re-game result winning was established has been taken over. If the player knows that the set value has not been changed, and conversely, if a new bet number needs to be set the next day, the set value may have been changed. That will be understood by the player.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the first notification state is set based on the specific re-game result, the first notification state is maintained for a specific period, and the specific re-game result is the other small winning combination result. While giving the impression that it is treated the same as the result of a loss, the result of another predetermined replay is that the first notification state is switched to the second notification state after the specific period has elapsed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp the situation in which the re-game result winning is established.

Feature B2. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a small winning combination result in which a predetermined number of game values are given by the privilege giving means is provided.
The lottery result by the lottery means is the small winning combination result, and after the rotation of the orbiting body corresponding to the small winning combination result is stopped, the operation notification means can be put into the first notification state. Control means (a function of executing a process of turning on the first credit lamp 56b by the display control device 81) and
When the specific period elapses after the orbiting of the orbiting body corresponding to the small combination result is stopped and the operation notification means is set to the first notification state, the first notification state can be maintained. 6th control means (a function to execute processing that is not set to the temporary standby state after a small role by the display control device 81)
The gaming machine according to the feature B1, which is characterized in that it is provided with.

According to the above configuration, after the small winning combination result, the operation notification means may be in the first notification state as in the case of the specific replay result. On the other hand, when the specific period elapses, the second notification state is set in the case of a specific replay result, and the first notification state is maintained in the case of a small winning combination result. By doing so, in the configuration of feature B1, not only is it understood that a specific replay result winning is established, but also a specific replay result winning or after a small winning combination result. It is possible to make it possible to determine whether or not there is.

That is, for example, when the small winning combination result is a stop result similar to the specific replay result, the operation notification means may be in the first notification state regardless of the result, but the specific replay result. After that, it will be in the second notification state after the lapse of a specific period, and after the small winning combination result of the similar stop roll, it will not be in the second notification state even after the lapse of a specific period. It is possible to realize a new playability such as grasping which result was obtained by the state change of the operation notification means after a specific period. By doing so, it is possible to use it to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B3. The re-game notification means (game state display by the main control device 101) can execute the re-game notification that the re-game state has been set by the predetermined notification means (re-game state display unit 76a) smaller than the operation notification means. Equipped with a function to execute part processing)
Described in feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the re-game notification means is configured to execute the re-game notification regardless of the type of the re-game result that triggered the setting of the re-game state. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to know that the re-game result winning has been established even by the re-game notification by the re-game notification means. By doing so, in the case of a specific re-game result, if the re-game notification is confirmed without confirming the change in the notification state of the operation notification means, it is clearly understood that the re-game result is the result. It becomes possible. In this case, since the re-game notification is configured to be performed by a predetermined notification means smaller than the operation notification means, it is possible to confirm that the re-game result is the result of the re-game, but the re-game notification is possible. Is less noticeable than the operation notification means, and is less likely to be a barrier that gives the impression that a specific replay result is treated in the same way as other small role results or missed results. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to the diversification of games using a specific re-game result while making it possible to confirm that the result is a re-game result.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the re-game notification means is capable of executing the re-game notification even after the lapse of the specific period.

According to the above configuration, after the lapse of a specific period, it is possible to confirm that the re-game result winning is established by the re-game notification, not by the change in the notification state of the operation notification means. In other words, when the re-game notification is performed after the lapse of a specific period, it is not possible to know whether it is after a predetermined re-game result winning or after a specific re-game result winning. Then, for example, in a configuration in which the stop rolls of the predetermined re-game result and the specific re-game result are similar and it is difficult to determine which re-game result is, the specific period is set. By confirming that the operation notification means is in the first notification state before the lapse of time, it becomes possible to grasp the result of a specific replay, and the degree of attention to the operation notification means is suitable. It is also possible to increase it to.

Feature B5. A production means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces a production according to the progress of the game, and
When the game is not performed for a predetermined period after the end of one game, the standby means (auxiliary display unit 65 by the display control device 81 is set to the standby state) that puts the effect means into the standby state. Function to execute the process to be executed) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the specific period is a period having a length different from that of the predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, the first notification state of the operation notification means based on the specific replay result is switched to the second notification state at a timing different from the timing when the production means is switched to the standby state as the so-called demo state. .. By doing so, in a game in which it is attempted to determine which re-game result is based on the change in the notification state of the operation notification means, it is confused that the change in the notification state has occurred due to the standby state. It becomes possible to avoid it. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the operation notification means is set to the first notification state after the small winning combination result or the disconnection result, the operation notification means is set to the first notification state after the small winning combination result or the like at the timing of switching to the standby state. In such a configuration, depending on the timing at which the operation notification means is switched from the first notification state to the second notification state, it may be a specific replay result or a small winning combination result. It is also possible to realize a playability that makes it possible to judge whether or not the situation was the same.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the specific period is shorter than the predetermined period.

Generally, a relatively long period is set as a predetermined period until the state is switched to the standby state as a so-called demo state. However, by using the above configuration, it is not necessary to wait for such a long period. , It is possible to perform a game as described in the feature B2, in which it is determined whether the result is a specific re-game result or a small winning combination result.

Feature B7. A production means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces a production according to the progress of the game, and
When the game is not performed for a predetermined period after the end of one game, the standby means (auxiliary display unit 65 by the display control device 81 is set to the standby state) that puts the effect means into the standby state. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
At least in the case where the standby state is set to the standby state by the standby means in the re-game state set based on the specific re-game result, and after a result different from the specific re-game result, the standby means waits. It is characterized by having a means (a function of executing a process for performing a specific replay winning notification by the display control device 81) capable of different modes of the standby state depending on the state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B6.

According to the above configuration, when the standby state is set, the player can clearly grasp from the aspect of the standby state that the result is after a specific re-game result. In this case, if it is attempted to determine from the aspect of the standby state that the result has been won after a specific re-game result, it is necessary to interrupt the game for at least a predetermined period until the standby state is set. By doing this, it is possible to realize a novel playability such as using the motivation of the player who wants to know the result quickly and waiting for the period until it becomes a standby state. Become.

Feature B8. A production means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces a production according to the progress of the game, and
When the game is not performed for a predetermined period after the end of one game, the standby means (auxiliary display unit 65 by the display control device 81 is set to the standby state) that puts the effect means into the standby state. Function to execute the process to be executed) and
A means for restricting the standby state from being set to the standby state by the standby means in the re-game state (a function of executing a process of disallowing the count of the standby counter in the re-game state by the main control device 101).
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6.

According to the above configuration, even if a predetermined period elapses after being set to the re-game state and the operation notification means is switched from the first notification state to the second notification state, the operation notification means is set to the standby state in the re-game state. Since it is restricted, the state of the standby state itself is restricted even after a predetermined period has passed, or the mode of the standby state is restricted so that only a part of the production means is in the standby state. The period until the standby state is reached is limited, for example, the standby state is not reached even after the lapse of a predetermined period, and then the standby state is reached. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it more conspicuous that the first notification state is switched to the second notification state when a specific period elapses in the re-game state, and the re-game can be used by using such a configuration. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly inform that the prize has been established.

Feature B9. Equipped with a virtual game value storage means (credit counter) that stores virtual game values up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers.
When a specific number of virtual game values corresponding to the number of bets set when the bet number operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the bet number operation means is used as the basis for the operation of the bet number operation means. When a specific number of bets is set, while the specific number of virtual game values is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is set even if the bet number operation means is operated. It is a configuration that is not done,
In the third control means, regardless of the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means, the re-game result that triggered the setting of the re-game state is the specific re-game result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that the operation notification means is set to the first notification state in the re-gaming state, if any.

According to the above configuration, in the re-game state after a specific re-game result, the operation notification means is set to the first notification state even if the virtual game value corresponding to the specific number of bets is not stored. By doing so, when the operation notification means is set to the first notification state after the specific re-game result, it is not necessary to grasp the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means, and the processing is performed. The configuration is simplified. Further, even though the virtual game value is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the operation notification means is set to the first notification state, so that the player is informed that the specific re-game result has been won. It is also possible to inform.

Feature B10. A virtual game value storage means (credit counter) that stores virtual game values up to a predetermined number, and
When a specific number of virtual game values corresponding to the number of bets set when the bet number operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the bet number operation means is used as the basis for the operation of the bet number operation means. When a specific number of bets is set, while the specific number of virtual game values is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is set even if the bet number operation means is operated. It is a configuration that is not done,
Clearing operation means (clearing switch 59) that can be operated by the player,
When the clearing operation means is operated, a clearing means (medal by the main control device 101) capable of clearing at least a number of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means. Function to execute return processing) and
Equipped with
When the clearing operation means is operated in a situation where the operation notification means is set to the first notification state based on the specific replay result, the operation notification means is in the first notification state. If the third transition period has not passed or the clearing operation counter has not reached a specific number in the medal return process by the main control device 101, the clearing process is not performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized in that the display control device 81 side is provided with a function of not turning off the first credit lamp 56).

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a number of game values corresponding to the virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means are cleared when the clearing operation means is operated, a specific re-game result can be obtained. Even if the clearing operation means is operated when the operation notification means is set to the first notification state based on the above, the first notification state is continued. Since the virtual game value stored when the clearing operation means is operated is settled as the game value, basically, the virtual game value that can be set even if the bet number operation means is operated is not stored. When the state is reached, it is considered that the operation notification means also switches from the first notification state to the second notification state after the small winning combination result or the deviation result. On the other hand, under the situation where the operation notification means is set to the first notification state based on the specific re-game result, the bet number can be set regardless of the number of stored virtual game values. , The first notification state is continued even if the clearing operation means is operated. By doing so, it is possible to realize new playability such as operating the clearing operation means to grasp that it is a specific re-game result through the presence or absence of a change in the notification state of the bet number notification means. Become.

In the above configuration, "when the clearing operation means is operated and the number of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means is cleared, the first notification is performed. By providing the means for switching the operation notification means, which is a state, to the second notification state, it is possible to more preferably achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect.

Further, the "clearing means" can pay out at least a number of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means when the clearing operation means is operated. It may be expressed as "payout means (function to execute medal return processing by the main control device 101)", and the change of the expression of the "clearing means" is made in other feature groups or other features using the same expression. Is also applicable.

Feature B11. When the clearing operation means is operated, the clearing limiting means (by the main control device 101) that can limit the execution of clearing of the game value corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means. Described in feature B10, which is characterized by having a function of not performing clearing processing when the third transition period has not passed or the clearing operation counter has not reached a specific number in the medal return processing. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the clearing operation means is operated, the clearing of the virtual game value may be restricted by the clearing limiting means. By doing so, when the first notification state is maintained even if the clearing operation means is operated under the situation where the bet number notification means is in the first notification state, the first is based on the specific replay result. 1 It becomes difficult to understand that the notification state is set. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the game by operating the clearing operation means to detect that it is a specific re-game result.

Feature B12. The clearing limiting means can limit the execution of clearing of the game value corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the predetermined specific number of the clearing operation means. And
The clearing means is configured to execute clearing of the game value corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the clearing operation means exceeding the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature B11.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means cannot be cleared even though the virtual game value is desired to be cleared while the effect of the feature B11 is exhibited. can.

Feature B13. When the operation notification means is in the first notification state based on the specific re-game result, the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the clearing operation means. When the number of game values corresponding to the above is cleared, the means for setting the operation notification means to the second notification state (the first credit lamp 56b is turned off based on the specific clearing command by the display control device 81) is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature B11 or the feature B12, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the above configuration, the operation notification means set to the first notification state based on the specific re-game result is set to the second notification state together with the settlement of the virtual game value. By doing so, when the operation for clearing the virtual game value is performed after a specific re-game result, when the clearing is performed while the clearing is restricted or the first notification state is continued. The first notification state is switched to the second notification state, which is the same as the notification state of other game results and the operation notification means. This makes it easier for only the player who performed the clearing operation to know that it is a specific re-game result, and suitably guarantees the superiority of the game that grasps that it is a specific re-game result by the clearing operation. It becomes possible to do.

Feature B14. The clearing means is configured to be capable of clearing a game value corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means when the clearing operation means is operated in the re-game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B10 to B13.

If the virtual game value can be settled even in the re-game state as in the above configuration, the event that the game is terminated in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result is likely to occur, and the feature B12 As described above, the significance of making it known that the result of a specific replay is after the result of the specific replay is enhanced by the continuation of the first notification state of the operation notification means by the clearing operation.

Feature B15. The clearing means is stored in the virtual game value storage means when the clearing operation means is operated by a special period shorter than the specific period elapses after being set to the re-game state. The gaming machine according to feature B14, which is characterized in that it has a configuration capable of executing settlement of gaming values corresponding to the number of virtual gaming values.

According to the above configuration, in the re-game state, the virtual game value cannot be settled until the special period elapses. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it easy to understand that the game is in the replay state.

The invention described in the above features B1 to B15 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. It is known that the player is given a privilege according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the start lever is placed in a situation where a medal as a game value is bet on a slot machine. When operated, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technique that "if it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "the game illustrated above here, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features B1 to B15, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A bet number operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) in which a bet number operation for setting a game bet number is performed, and
When the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed, the bet number setting means for setting the bet number of the game (the function of executing the first operation correspondence process and the second operation correspondence process by the main control device 101) ,
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player according to a bet number set by the bet number setting means based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101). When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
It is provided with a bet number notification means (a function of executing a bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81) for executing a bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
The bet number notification means is in a first specific situation in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (small winning combination result) and the lap of the orbiting body corresponding to the first result is stopped. While the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number used for the first result lottery ends when a predetermined specific period elapses, the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. A bet used for a lottery that is a different second result (specific replay result) and is a second specific situation after the lap of the orbiting body corresponding to the second result is stopped. The bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the number can be continued even after the specific period has elapsed (the process for provisional standby of the bet display unit 34 in the replay state by the display control device 81). A gaming machine characterized by having a function that does not perform.

According to the above configuration, the bet number of the game is set based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and a lottery is performed according to the set bet number. , Corresponds to the number of bets on each game in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of the lottery is given when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at an effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means. If the result of the game is the first result, the notification of the number of bets to be played ends when a specific period elapses after the end of this game due to the stop of the orbiting body or the grant of a privilege. If the result of the game is the second result, it does not end even after a specific period has passed. By doing so, while assuming a game in which the result of the lottery is grasped by the stop roll of the orbiting body, not only the stop roll of the orbiting body but also the length of the period during which the existing bet number correspondence notification is continued. It is possible to grasp the result of the game by making good use of, for example, when it is difficult to determine which result from the stop roll, whether or not the bet number correspondence notification after the lapse of a specific period ends. It is also possible to perform a game such as making a judgment as to which result. In particular, it waits after the orbiting body is stopped, which is the opposite of the gameplay that promotes the smooth progress of the game and improves the interest of the game by letting the player judge which result is obtained after a specific period of time. This makes it possible to provide a novel playability such that the result can be judged, and such playability can greatly contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

The "first specific situation" and the "second specific situation" may be expressed as follows, and such a change in the expression can be applied to other features and feature groups using the corresponding expression.

"The lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (small winning combination result), and each of the above started based on the operation of the start operation means for which the lottery corresponding to the first result is performed. After the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped or after the privilege based on the first result is granted by the privilege granting means, "the first specific situation" and "the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (specific replay result). ), After the rotation of each orbiting body started based on the operation of the starting operation means for which the lottery corresponding to the second result is stopped, or by the privilege granting means. Second specific situation after the benefits based on the second result have been granted. "

Feature C2. If the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed during the execution of the bet number correspondence notification by the bet number notification means, the bet number corresponding notification being executed is terminated and then the bet number is changed to the current bet number. An update means capable of executing an update notification for updating to a corresponding bet number correspondence notification (in the bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81, the bet display unit 34 is temporarily turned off based on various bet number operations, and then a bet is made. It is equipped with a function to execute processing that enables the corresponding effect to be performed.
The update means can execute the update notification when the bet number operation is performed in the first specific situation, and the update notification is performed when the bet number operation is performed in the second specific situation. Is feasible and
When the renewal notification is performed by the renewal means in the first specific situation, the specific bet number notification means can continue the bet number correspondence notification after the lapse of the specific period. The gaming machine according to the feature C1.

According to the above configuration, after any result, when the bet number operation is performed, the bet number correspondence notification up to that point is once terminated and then updated to the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the current bet number operation. .. In this case, after the bet number operation is performed after the first result, the updated bet number correspondence notification is continued even after the lapse of a specific period. By doing this, if you try to determine which result was the result depending on whether or not the bet number correspondence notification is continued after a specific period, waiting is the key to the game, such as discouraging the bet number operation. It is possible to realize a novel playability. In addition, if a new game is to be performed by performing a bet number operation, the bet number correspondence notification updated by the bet number operation has a function of notifying the bet number regardless of the result of the previous game. It will be possible to secure it.

Feature C3. A production means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces a production according to the progress of the game, and
A function of executing a standby process by the display control device 81 to put the effect means into a standby state when the game is not performed for a predetermined period longer than the specific period after the end of one game. )When,
Means that allow the standby means to enter the standby state in the first specific situation, while restricting the standby state from being put into the standby state by the standby means in the second specific situation (re-measurement by the main control device 101). A function to execute a process that disallows the count of the standby counter in the game state),
The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or the feature C2.

According to the above configuration, the production means is put into a standby state when a predetermined period elapses after the first specific situation after the game, which is the first result, and the bet number correspondence notification ends when the specific period elapses. , Even if a predetermined period has elapsed since the second specific situation after the game that resulted in the second result, the production means is restricted from being in a standby state, and the number of bets even after the specific period has elapsed. Correspondence notification does not end. By increasing the material for discriminating between the first result and the second result in this way, it is possible to improve the playability of discriminating both results.

Feature C4. If the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed during the execution of the bet number correspondence notification by the bet number notification means, the bet number corresponding notification being executed is terminated and then the bet number is changed to the current bet number. An update means capable of executing an update notification for updating to a corresponding bet number correspondence notification (in the bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81, the bet display unit 34 is temporarily turned off based on various bet number operations, and then bets are made. It is equipped with a function to execute processing that enables the corresponding effect to be performed.
The update means can execute the update notification when the bet number operation is performed in the first specific situation, and the update notification is performed when the bet number operation is performed in the second specific situation. Is feasible and
The specific bet number notification means can continue the bet number correspondence notification after the specific period has elapsed when the update notification is performed by the update means in the first specific situation. , The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized in that the bet number correspondence notification is terminated by entering the standby state.

According to the above configuration, after any result, when the bet number operation is performed, the bet number correspondence notification up to that point is once terminated and then updated to the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the current bet number operation. .. In this case, after the bet number operation is performed after the first result, the updated bet number correspondence notification is continued even after the lapse of a specific period. By doing this, if you try to determine which result was the result depending on whether or not the bet number correspondence notification is continued after a specific period, waiting is the key to the game, such as discouraging the bet number operation. It is possible to realize a novel playability. In addition, if a new game is to be performed by performing a bet number operation, the bet number correspondence notification updated by the bet number operation has a function of notifying the bet number regardless of the result of the previous game. It will be possible to secure it.

In addition, when the standby state is entered, the bet number correspondence notification is terminated in the first specific situation after the first result. Therefore, if the bet number operation is mistakenly performed, a predetermined period is reached until the standby state is reached. It is only necessary to wait for a long time, and it is possible to appropriately relieve the player's erroneous operation.

Feature C5. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, as a privilege given by the privilege giving means, the lottery means again with the small winning combination result in which a predetermined number of game values are given and the same number of bets as the number of bets this time. The re-gambling result, which is set to the re-gambling state that enables the lottery by, is set.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the first result is a predetermined small winning combination result, and the second result is a predetermined re-gaming result.

According to the above configuration, in the case of a small winning combination result in which a predetermined number of game values are given, the bet number correspondence notification is sent in a specific period in the first specific situation after the end of the game resulting in the small winning combination. After that, the bet number correspondence notification ends. On the other hand, in the case of the re-game result set to the re-game state, the bet number correspondence notification continues even after the specific period in the second specific situation after the end of the game that became the re-game result. Will be done. In the case of a re-game result, the next game can be played with the same number of bets as the number of bets of the game that resulted in the re-game. , It can be used as it is as a bet number correspondence notification for the next game. Therefore, by continuing the bet number correspondence notification even after a specific period as in the above configuration, it is possible to omit the state change of the bet number correspondence notification without causing a contradiction with the progress of the game.

Feature C6. If the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed during the execution of the bet number correspondence notification by the bet number notification means, the bet number corresponding notification being executed is terminated and then the bet number is changed to the current bet number. An update means capable of executing an update notification for updating to a corresponding bet number correspondence notification (in the bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81, the bet display unit 34 is temporarily turned off based on various bet number operations, and then a bet is made. It is equipped with a function to execute processing that enables the corresponding effect to be performed.
When the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed in the re-game state set based on the re-game result, the update means corresponds to the lottery resulting in the re-game result. The gaming machine according to feature C5, characterized in that it is possible to execute an update notification for updating to a bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game state after the correspondence notification is completed.

According to the above configuration, when the re-game result is obtained, the next game can be performed with the same number of bets as the bet number of the game that resulted in the re-game, but the same bet number correspondence notification itself can be diverted. Even if there is, the update notification is performed based on the bet number operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the flow of the game and the game progress, which require the bet number operation for setting a new bet number, to be the same as the first result as the small winning combination result. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the result and the second result. Therefore, it becomes more necessary to determine the result depending on whether or not the state of the bet number correspondence notification changes after a specific period, and it is possible to improve the interest of such a game.

Feature C7. As the re-game result, a predetermined re-game result and a specific re-game result are set.
When the re-game state is set based on the predetermined re-game result, the update means executes the update notification without going through the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, while the re-game state is set. The gaming machine according to feature C6, which, when set based on the specific re-gambling result, executes the update notification via the betting number operation of the betting number operating means.

According to the above configuration, the configuration in which the update notification is performed via the bet number operation in the replay state as in the feature C6 does not apply to all the replay results, but a part (specific replay result). It is a configuration that applies only to. By doing so, the bet number is set as it is if it is set to the replay state, so it is assumed that the update notification is normally performed without going through the bet number operation, and the bet number is set. By performing the update notification via the operation, it is possible to give the impression that the re-gambling state is not set, and it is difficult to distinguish a specific re-gambling result from the first result as a small winning combination result. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest in the playability of determining whether or not the state of the bet number notification means changes with the lapse of a specific period.

Feature C8. The bet number notification means executes the bet number correspondence notification by a specific notification means, and the bet number notification means is executed.
A second bet number notification means (main control) that executes bet number notification corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means by a predetermined notification means (BET display unit 75) different from the specific notification means. It has a function to execute BET processing by the device 101).
The second bet number notification means ends when the bet number notification corresponding to the bet number used in the lottery as the first result elapses in a predetermined predetermined period in the first specific situation. On the other hand, in the second specific situation, the specific second bet number notification corresponding to the bet number used in the lottery resulting in the second result can be continued even after the predetermined period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that the means (a function of executing a standby process of the BET display unit 75 by the main control device 101) is provided.

According to the above configuration, the first result and the second result can be discriminated not only from the continuation of the bet number correspondence notification by the bet number notification means but also from the continuation of the bet number notification by the second bet number notification means. It will be possible to do. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of branches of judgment in the game in which the result is determined from the presence / absence of the bet number correspondence notification and the continuation of the bet number notification, and it is possible to suitably enhance the interest of the game.

Feature C9. The specific notification means is set so as to be easier for the player to identify than the predetermined notification means.
The gaming machine according to feature C8, wherein the specific period is shorter than the predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the result can be determined will come earlier depending on whether or not the bet number correspondence notification is continued by the specific notification means having higher distinctiveness. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably perform a game in which the result is determined from the presence or absence of continuation of the notification.

The invention described in the above features C1 to C9 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. It is known that the player is given a privilege according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the start lever is placed in a situation where a medal as a game value is bet on a slot machine. When operated, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technique that "if it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "the game illustrated above here, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features C1 to C9, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A virtual game value storage means (credit counter) that stores virtual game values up to a predetermined number, and
A bet number operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) in which an operation for setting a game bet number is performed, and
When the bet number operation means is operated, the bet number setting means (a function of executing the first operation correspondence process and the second operation correspondence process by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game, and
Equipped with
When a specific number of virtual game values corresponding to the number of bets set when the bet number operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the bet number operation means is used as the basis for the operation of the bet number operation means. When a specific number of bets is set, while the specific number of virtual game values is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is set even if the bet number operation means is operated. It is a configuration that is not done,
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player according to a bet number set by the bet number setting means based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101). When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
Clearing operation means (clearing switch 59) that can be operated by the player,
When the clearing operation means is operated, a clearing means (medal by the main control device 101) capable of clearing at least a number of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means. Function to execute return processing) and
Bet number notification means (display control device 81 bet time effect setting) for executing bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means by a predetermined bet number notification means (bet display unit 34). Function to execute processing) and
When the clearing operation means is operated, a pseudo bet effect based on receiving a specific clearing command by the specific bet number notification means (display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification by the predetermined bet number notification means is performed. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the bet number of the game is set based on the operation of the bet number operation means, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the lottery according to the set bet number is performed and stopped. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of the lottery is given when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at an effective position based on the operation of the operation means, the bet number of the game is the bet number notification means. Since it is possible to grasp the bet number correspondence notification by, the player can clearly grasp the operation of the bet number operation means and the bet number this time, which makes the game suitable. Can be advanced.

Then, in the above configuration, when the clearing operation means is operated, the number of game values corresponding to the virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means is cleared, and then the clearing is performed. Based on the operation of the operation means, the bet number corresponding notification may be performed by the bet number notification means. The clearing operation means is generally operated when the game is ended, but as in the above configuration, when the game is about to be ended, the specific bet number notification means is used to perform specific notification. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that the situation should not end the game, such as the situation where the bet number of the game is set. Therefore, it is possible to suitably avoid an event that may be disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to optimize the progress of the game.

Feature D2. When the bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the bet number notification means ends the bet number correspondence notification that has been executed until the bet number is set, and then sets the bet number to the current bet number. It is a configuration that executes the corresponding bet number correspondence notification.
When the clearing operation means is operated, the specific bet number notification means executes the specific bet number notification after ending the bet number correspondence notification that has been executed until the clearing operation means is operated. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it is possible to play.

According to the above configuration, a new bet number is set based on the operation of the clearing operation means, and after the clearing, the next game can be executed without further setting a new bet number. It is possible to make an impression. By doing so, it is possible to discourage the player who is about to end the game by liquidation.

Feature D3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, as a privilege given by the privilege granting means, a re-gaming state is set in which the lottery by the lottery means can be received again with the same number of bets as the current bet number. The re-gambling result to be played is set,
When the clearing operation means is operated in the re-game state, the specific bet number notification means uses the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game state as the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, which is configured to be executed.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the game is a re-game result, the re-game state is set in which the lottery can be received again with the same number of bets as the number of bets of the lottery that resulted in the re-game. When the clearing operation means is operated in the game state, the bet number set in the re-game state is notified as the bet number correspondence notification. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of disadvantages of the player, such as ending the game even though the game is set to the re-game state.

Feature D4. When the clearing operation means is operated in the re-game state, the clearing means can execute clearing of the game value corresponding to the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means. The gaming machine according to the feature D3.

As in the above configuration, in a configuration in which the clearing operation means can be operated even in the re-gaming state, the game is likely to be terminated without playing the game in the re-gaming state. In that respect, as in the above feature D3, since the specific notification is performed based on the operation of the clearing operation means, it becomes easy to notice that the player is in the re-gaming state, and the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage is reduced. be able to.

Feature D5. When the clearing operation means is operated in a situation where the clearing means is not set to the re-game state, the clearing means clears the game value including the game value corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means. The gaming machine according to the feature D3 or the feature D4, which is characterized in that the above is feasible.

According to the above configuration, when the clearing operation means is operated in a situation where the re-gaming state is not set, the clearing is performed including the set bet number. In this case, although the bet number correspondence notification is not performed by the specific bet number notification means, if the game is to be played after the settlement, it is necessary to set a new bet number, and even if the game is ended as it is. It is unlikely that the player will be disadvantaged. Therefore, by making the above configuration, the player notices that the specific notification is performed at the time of clearing by highlighting the strangeness that the specific notification is performed when the clearing operation means is operated. It will be easier. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to be less likely to suffer a disadvantage.

Feature D6. When the clearing operation means is operated, the clearing limiting means (by the main control device 101) that can limit the execution of clearing of the game value corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that the clearing operation counter is provided with a function of not performing clearing processing until a specific number is reached.

According to the above configuration, even if the clearing operation means is operated, the clearing of the virtual game value may be restricted by the clearing limiting means. By doing so, even if the configuration is such that the clearing is performed including the game value corresponding to the already set bet number based on the operation of the clearing operation means, the set bet number is supported. Even if the bet number correspondence notification is performed as a specific notification, there is no contradiction between the bet number correspondence notification and the bet number. Therefore, it is possible to support the decision-making to continue the game by using the specific notification without deteriorating the reliability of the specific notification.

Feature D7. The clearing limiting means can limit the execution of the payout of the game value corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the predetermined specific number of the clearing operation means. And
The clearing means is configured to execute clearing of the game value corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the clearing operation means exceeding the specific number. The gaming machine according to the feature D6.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means cannot be cleared even though the virtual game value is desired to be cleared, while the effect of the feature D6 is exhibited.

Feature D8. The clearing limiting means is a virtual game stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the clearing operation means at least until a predetermined period (third transition period) elapses from the end of the previous game. It is possible to limit the execution of the settlement of the game value equivalent to the number of values,
The clearing means is configured to execute clearing of the game value corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the clearing operation means after the lapse of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to feature D6 or feature D7.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means cannot be cleared even though the virtual game value is desired to be cleared, while the effect of the feature D6 is exhibited. In particular, by making it impossible to clear even if the clearing operation means is operated until a predetermined period has elapsed, even a player who constantly hits the clearing operation means at the time of clearing will not be cleared. Through this, it becomes possible to understand that the situation is not such that the game should be ended.

Feature D9. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, as a privilege given by the privilege granting means, a re-gaming state is set in which the lottery by the lottery means can be received again with the same number of bets as the current bet number. The re-gambling result to be played is set,
The specific bet number notification means is set in the re-game state when the clearing operation means is operated in the re-game state set based on the specific re-game result as the re-game result. While the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number is executed as the specific notification, in the re-gaming state set based on a predetermined re-game result different from the specific re-game result as the re-game result. The features D1 to D8 are characterized in that when the clearing operation means is operated, the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the replay state is not executed as the specific notification. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the game is a re-game result, the re-game state is such that the lottery can be received again with the same number of bets as the number of bets of the lottery that resulted in the re-game. When the clearing operation means is operated in the re-game state triggered by the re-game result of, the bet number set in the re-game state is notified as the bet number correspondence notification. In this case, even if the clearing operation means is operated in the re-game state triggered by a predetermined re-game result different from the specific re-game result, the bet number correspondence notification is not performed. By doing so, the scene where the bet number correspondence notification is performed when the clearing operation means is operated becomes more limited, and the strangeness of the bet number correspondence notification being performed is emphasized by this, and the game is played. It becomes easier for the person to notice it.

Feature D10. When the virtual game value is cleared by the clearing means, the clearing notification means (a function of executing the return effect processing by the display control device 81) that executes the clearing notification by the predetermined notification means, and
When the specific notification is executed by the specific bet number notification means, the restriction means (effect at the time of return after the pseudo-bet effect by the display control device 81) can execute the restriction processing of either the specific notification and the clearing notification. A function to execute a process such as outputting a sound or executing a pseudo-bet effect after settlement (Fig. 92), and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a specific notification is performed when the virtual game value is cleared by the clearing means, there is an inconvenience in processing and production due to the overlap of the clearing notification at the time of clearing and the specific notification. It can be preferably eliminated.

Feature D11. The gaming machine according to feature D10, wherein the clearing notification means can execute the clearing notification for a period longer than a period until the specific notification is completed.

According to the above configuration, even if the clearing notification is restricted in the configuration of the feature D10, there is still room for clearing notification after the specific notification is completed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the overlap between the clearing notification and the specific notification within the range in which the meaning of facilitating the identification of fraudulent activity by performing the clearing notification is not lost.

The invention described in the above features D1 to D11 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. It is known that the player is given a privilege according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the start lever is placed in a situation where a medal as a game value is bet on a slot machine. When operated, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technique that "if it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "the game illustrated above here, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features D1 to D11, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed. Drive control means (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A bet number operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) in which a bet number operation for setting a game bet number is performed,
Based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, the bet number setting means (medal insertion correspondence process, first operation correspondence processing, second operation correspondence processing, etc. by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game is executed. Function) and
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player according to a bet number set by the bet number setting means based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101). When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed, the bet number notification (bet correspondence effect) corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means is executed after the specific notification (bet process effect) is executed. (A function to execute the bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81) and the bet number notification means (a function of executing the bet time effect setting process)
When the start operation means is operated, the start notification means (a function of executing the start effect setting process by the display control device 81) for executing the start notification by the specific notification means or a notification means different from the specific notification means, and
When the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is executed, the specific processing means (push by the display control device 81) that executes the specific process capable of limiting the start notification by the start notification means. A gaming machine characterized by having a function (a function of executing a process of delaying a forward notification effect).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of Is performed by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is assumed that the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, and the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation. There is a high possibility that the start notification and processing overlap with the processing for specific notification and specific notification, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase, or the duplication of notification and processing may cause confusion for the player. be.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, the specific processing means for executing the specific processing capable of limiting the start notification is provided. The overlap between the start notification and the specific notification, and the overlap between the start notification process and the specific notification process are eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably advancing the game.

Feature E2. The feature E1 is characterized in that when the specific processing is performed by the specific processing means, the specific notification by the bet number notification means is executed in the same notification mode as when the specific processing is not performed. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when the specific process for limiting the start notification is performed, the notification mode on the specific notification side that has already been started is not changed, so that there is no need for complicated processing such as changing the running notification in the middle. , It is possible to avoid an increase in processing load.

Feature E3. The specific processing means makes the specific processing performed when the situation in which the start notification is executed by the start notification means based on the operation of the start operation means is the specific situation, while the start operation means. The feature E1 is characterized in that the specific process is not performed when the situation in which the start notification is executed by the start notification means is different from the specific situation based on the operation of. Or the gaming machine according to the feature E2.

According to the above configuration, if the situation in which the start notification is actually executed based on the operation of the start operation means is a specific situation, the specific process is performed, while the situation in which the start notification is executed is the specific situation. Otherwise, no specific processing will be performed. By doing so, for example, even if the configuration is such that the timing at which the operation of the start operation means is performed and the timing at which the start notification is performed are different from each other, the start notification and the specific notification are substantially overlapped. Can be suitably avoided.

Feature E4. The specific processing means is a predetermined start notification (specific combination notification effect) by the start notification means based on the operation of the start operation means even when the operation of the start operation means is executed in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the specific process is not executed when is executed in a situation different from the specific situation.

By making the above configuration, when there is a difference between the operation timing of the start operation means and the execution timing of the start notification, the specific processing is not performed until the start notification does not overlap with the specific notification. It becomes possible to eliminate unnecessary execution of processing.

Feature E5. The start notification means can execute the first start notification (push order notification effect) and the second start notification (specific combination notification effect) as the start notification.
From the start of the start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses, the start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control (the wait time in the rotation start process by the main control device 101 elapses). Equipped with a function to execute the process of waiting for the start of rotation)
When the start operation means is operated before the lapse of the specific period, the start notification means executes the first start notification when the start operation means is operated, and the second start is performed. The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the notification is executed when the start drive control is started.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature E4, and by making the execution timing of the start notification different before and after the lapse of a specific period as a so-called wait period, it is possible to fully exert the function of each start notification.

Feature E6. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result can be established, and the stop operation means is a second operation different from the first operation mode. When the operation is performed in the mode, the operation mode result (pushing order combination) is set so that the winning of the second result different from the first result can be established.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation mode result, the mode notification means (by the display control device 81) capable of executing the mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. Equipped with a function to execute processing for performing push order notification effect)
The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the first start notification includes the mode notification by the mode notification means.

As in the above configuration, if the operation mode result is such that the winning result differs depending on whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode, a more careful operation of the stop operation means is performed. As required, it is highly significant to execute the mode notification before the lapse of a specific period as a so-called wait period. However, even so, if there is an overlap with the specific notification of the bet number correspondence notification, it is not enough to give priority to it, but by doing the above, it is possible to start the mode notification before the lapse of the specific period. While encouraging careful operation, it is possible to suitably avoid a sense of discomfort due to overlapping productions.

Feature E7. As a result of the operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means when the prize of the first result is established and the privilege given by the privilege granting means when the prize of the second result is established. A specific operation mode result (push order bell) with different benefits for the player is set, and
The specific processing means is characterized by comprising means capable of preventing the specific processing from being executed when the first start notification is based on the specific operation mode result. The gaming machine described in E6.

The significance of performing the first start operation as mode notification before the elapse of a specific period as a so-called wait period is mainly to encourage more careful operation of the stop operation means, as in the above configuration. Regarding the mode notification when the player's profit is different depending on the winning result, the player's profit is preferable by not limiting the mode notification even if it overlaps with the specific notification. It is possible to secure the profit.

Feature E8. As a result of the operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means when the prize of the first result is established and the privilege given by the privilege granting means when the prize of the second result is established. Predetermined operation mode results (usually rips A to C) that have common benefits for players are set, and
The gaming machine according to feature E6 or feature E7, wherein the specific processing means executes the specific processing when the first start notification is based on the predetermined operation mode result.

The significance of performing the first start operation as mode notification before the elapse of a specific period as a so-called wait period is mainly to encourage more careful operation of the stop operation means, as in the above configuration. Regarding the mode notification when the player's benefit is a predetermined operation mode result that is common regardless of the winning result, the player is disadvantaged by limiting the mode notification when it overlaps with the specific notification. It is possible to eliminate the overlap between the specific notification and the start notification within the range that does not occur.

Feature E9. When the start operation means is operated, the specific drive control means (main control device 101 executes the rotation effect process) that executes the specific drive control for performing the game effect using each of the orbiting bodies for a specific period. Function) and
In the specific situation where the specific notification is executed, when the start operation means is operated and the specific drive control by the specific drive control means is executed based on the operation of the start operation means, the specific notification is executed. It is provided with a second specific processing means (a function of executing a process of switching a bet process effect to a bet-compatible effect based on a first freeze command by the display control device 81) for executing a second specific process capable of limiting. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E8.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the specific drive control as a so-called freeze effect in which the game effect using the orbiting body is performed is executed as the start notification based on the operation of the start operation means, the specific drive control is the specific notification. In the case of overlapping with, the specific notification side is restricted instead of the specific drive control. In general, the specific drive control as the freeze effect described above is generally an effect with a relatively high expectation for a big hit, and by doing so, the player pays a lot of attention. It is possible to preferably avoid that the execution of the specific drive control that is likely to be performed is restricted by overlapping with the specific notification.

The invention described in the above features E1 to E9 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. It is known that the player is given a privilege according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the start lever is placed in a situation where a medal as a game value is bet on a slot machine. When operated, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technique that "if it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "the game illustrated above here, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features E1 to E9, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A bet number operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) in which a bet number operation for setting a game bet number is performed,
A bet number setting means (a function of executing a first operation correspondence process and a second operation correspondence process by the main control device 101) for setting a bet number of a game based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means.
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player according to a bet number set by the bet number setting means based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101). When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Specific notification means (a function of executing the bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81) for executing specific notification (bet process effect) corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means, and
From the start of the start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses, the start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control (the wait time in the rotation start process by the main control device 101 elapses). (Function to execute the process of waiting for the start of rotation) and
Equipped with
In the specific notification means, the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and the bet number is set by the bet number setting means after the rotation of the orbiting body corresponding to the specific result is stopped. When the specific situation to be performed is before the lapse of the specific period, the specific notification is set as the first notification mode, while when the specific situation is after the lapse of the specific period or the specific notification is the said. When the situation is such that the specific notification is executed over a specific period, the specific notification can be set to a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (specific replay bet effect by the display control device 81). In the setting process, it is a function to switch to a bet-compatible effect after the wait period has elapsed, or to perform a process of performing a replay bet effect before the wait period has elapsed, while performing a continuous bet effect after the wait period). A game machine.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In the so-called slot machine gaming machine to which the privilege corresponding to the result of is given, the start drive control and the start drive control are executed at intervals of a specific period or more, so that they are executed per unit time. The number of possible games is limited, and the games are optimized.

In such a configuration in which a so-called weight such as a specific period is specified, it is possible to set the number of bets as a preparation for the start of rotation and accept the operation of the start operation means before the elapse of the specific period, but in the end. Even if preparations are made before the start of rotation, the start of rotation itself is performed with the lapse of a specific period, and the production or the like according to the start of rotation is not performed until the start of rotation.

Therefore, in the above configuration, if the bet number is set before the elapse of the specific period, the specific notification corresponding to the bet number is performed in the first notification mode, and the bet number is set after the elapse of the specific period. When the setting is made or the specific notification is performed over a specific period, the specific notification is performed in the second notification mode, and the number of bets is set in relation to the passage of the specific period. Since the corresponding notification mode of the specific notification is made different, for example, if the bet number is set before the lapse of the specific period, the specific notification is more flashy than usual. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by using the waiting time of the wait.

Not only that, by making the notification mode of the specific notification different before and after the elapse of the specific period, while making the specific notification relatively loose before the elapse of the specific period, the rotation is started with the elapse of the specific period. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the effect at the start of rotation and its processing from overlapping with the specific notification, such as by completing the specific notification relatively quickly, which has the effect of reducing the processing load. It is also possible to anticipate the effect of preventing confusion among players by eliminating duplication of production.

As a result of the above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing a gaming.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the second notification mode is a mode in which execution of notification in at least a part of the specific notifications in the first notification mode is restricted.

As in the above configuration, the mode of the specific notification when the specific period has elapsed or spans the specific period is the mode in which the execution of the notification of at least a part of the specific notifications in the first notification mode is restricted. By doing so, it is clarified that the first notification mode is more flashy than the second notification mode, and the processing load is reduced when the second notification mode is executed. It is also clarified that the overlap with the production at the start of rotation can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of the feature E1.

Feature F3. The specific notification means is
When the specific notification is performed, the specific notification is executed including the first specific notification (lighting effect) and the second specific notification (bet time sound effect effect) different from the first specific notification.
The specific notification is executed with the mode including the first specific notification and the second specific notification as the first notification mode, and the mode including the first specific notification but not including the second specific notification is the second. The gaming machine according to feature F2, which is configured to execute the specific notification as a notification mode.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature F2, and in particular, as a configuration for limiting at least a part of the notification, the execution of the second specific notification among the first specific notification and the second specific notification is performed after the lapse of the specific period. By performing the specific notification in a limited manner, it is possible to suitably avoid an increase in the processing load due to the restriction of the execution of all the specific notifications.

Features F4. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the first specific notification is a predetermined display effect, and the second specific notification is a predetermined sound effect.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature F3. In particular, the display effect is more complicated to execute than the sound effect, and the amount of data to be set tends to be large. However, as in the above configuration, when a specific period as a wait period has elapsed, the first By executing the display effect as the specific notification as it is and not executing the sound effect as the second specific notification, it is possible to achieve the effect of the feature F1 within a range that does not cause complication of processing. Further, for the display effect, if the area where the display effect is executed is different, the overlap between the specific notification and the effect at the start of rotation can be allowed, but for the sound effect, a plurality of sounds are mixed and output. It is considered that there is a great deal of discomfort, and by doing so, it is possible to eliminate the overlap with the production at the start of rotation without discomfort.

Feature F5. In the specific notification means, the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the bet number is set by the bet number setting means after the rotation of the orbiting body corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped. A means (display) for executing the specific notification in the first notification mode when the situation is after the lapse of the specific period or when the specific notification is executed over the specific period. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a normal re-game bet effect setting process by the control device 81).

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific notification is performed in the first notification mode when the bet number is set after the specific result and before the lapse of the specific period, the specific notification is performed after the lapse of the specific period or the specific period. Even when straddling the above, it may be performed in the first notification mode. As described above, on the premise that the specific notification by the first notification mode may be executed regardless of the lapse of the specific period, it is different from the second notification mode after the specific result and before the lapse of the specific period. Even if the specific notification is performed in the first notification mode, it is possible to accept it without discomfort.

Moreover, by adopting the above configuration, the first notification mode is not a notification mode dedicated to the specific result, but is executed even with a predetermined result. Therefore, the specific notification is performed before and after the specific period after the specific result. It is possible to reduce the amount of stored data in order to make the notification mode different.

Feature F6. In the specific notification means, the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the bet number is set by the bet number setting means after the rotation of the orbiting body corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped. When the situation is before the lapse of the specific period, the means for executing the specific notification in the second notification mode (a function of executing the continuous bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) is provided. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F5.

According to the above configuration, it is specified in the configuration in which the specific notification is performed in the second notification mode when the bet number is set after the specific result and after the lapse of the specific period or when the lapse of the specific period is crossed. Even before the elapse of the period, it may be performed in the second notification mode. As described above, on the premise that the specific notification by the second notification mode may be executed regardless of the lapse of the specific period, the second notification mode is different from the first notification mode after the lapse of the specific period after the specific result. 2 Even if specific notification is performed in the notification mode, it is possible to accept it without discomfort.

Moreover, by adopting the above configuration, the second notification mode is not a notification mode dedicated to the specific result, but is executed even with a predetermined result. Therefore, the specific notification is performed before and after the specific period after the specific result. It is possible to reduce the amount of stored data in order to make the notification mode different.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein the second notification mode is set so that the notification period required for the specific notification is shorter than that of the first notification mode. ..

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed in the first notification mode, which is a relatively long notification period before the lapse of the specific period and before the rotation of the orbiting body is started, and after the lapse of the specific period, etc. However, when the rotation of the orbiting body is started, the specific notification is performed in the second notification mode, which is a relatively short notification period. By doing so, it is possible to make a specific notification according to the actual situation of the game progress.

Feature F8. The bet number setting means has a configuration in which the bet number can be set up to a predetermined specific number.
It has a plurality of notification units (bet display units 34a to 34c) and has a plurality of notification units (bet display units 34a to 34c).
The specific notification means is configured to execute the specific notification by switching the notification unit of the number corresponding to the bet number from the non-notification state to the notification state among the plurality of notification units.
After switching the predetermined notification unit to the notification state, the waiting period until the next notification unit of the predetermined notification unit is switched to the notification state is longer in the second notification mode than in the first notification mode. The gaming machine according to feature F7, which is characterized in that it is set to be short.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature F7, and as described above, if the length of the notification period is realized by different intervals when the plurality of notification units are sequentially in the notification state, the first notification is performed. It is possible to realize the mode and the second notification mode with a relatively simple configuration, and it is possible to reduce the amount of stored data.

The invention described in the above features F1 to F8 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. It is known that the player is given a privilege according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the start lever is placed in a situation where a medal as a game value is bet on a slot machine. When operated, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technique that "if it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "the game illustrated above here, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features F1 to F8, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A bet number operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) in which a bet number operation for setting a game bet number is performed,
Based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, the bet number setting means (medal insertion correspondence process, first operation correspondence processing, second operation correspondence processing, etc. by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game is executed. Function) and
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player according to a bet number set by the bet number setting means based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101). When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed, the specific notification (bet process effect) is executed, and the bet number correspondence notification (bet correspondence effect) corresponding to the bet number set based on the bet number operation is performed. A bet number notification means (a function of executing a bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81) executed by a specific notification means (bet display unit 34), and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a re-game result and the pattern combination corresponding to the re-game result is stopped at the effective position, the number of bets on which the lottery by the lottery means which is the re-game result is performed. In the re-game state in which the same number of bets as the above is set, the re-game setting means (process for re-game setting by the main control device 101) that executes the re-game process that enables the lottery by the lottery means to be received again. Function to execute) and
Equipped with
The bet number operating means includes a first bet number operating means (first credit insertion switch 56) and a second bet number operating means (medal insertion slot 45, second credit insertion switch 57).
When the re-game process is performed based on the specific re-game result (specific re-game result), the specific notification can be executed in the first notification mode based on the bet number operation of the first bet number operation means. 1st specific notification means (a function to execute a specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81),
When the re-game process is performed based on the specific re-game result (specific re-game result), the second notification different from the first notification mode is based on the bet number operation of the second bet number operation means. A second specific notification means (a function of executing a specific replay bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification in the embodiment (single bet effect), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In the so-called slot machine gaming machine to which the privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, the bet number is set when the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed, and the bet corresponding to the set bet number is set through the specific notification. Number correspondence notification is performed. Therefore, in addition to being able to grasp the bet number set based on one's own bet number operation by the bet number correspondence notification, it is also possible to grasp that the bet number operation has been accepted by the specific notification, and unnecessary betting. It is possible to prevent a number of operations from being performed.

Moreover, when a winning of a specific re-game result is established and the re-game process is performed, the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game process is used for the bet number operation of the bet number operation means. It is done based on. Even in this case, since the specific notification is performed before the bet number correspondence notification, the notification mode is the same as when the bet number is set by the bet number setting means based on the normal bet number operation. ..

Then, after the specific re-game result winning, the bet number operation of the first bet number operation means is performed and the bet number operation of the second bet number operation means is performed. By making the notification mode of the specific notification different, it is possible to make the notification mode a notification mode associated with the normal bet number operation of each bet number operation means. As a result, even if the re-gambling result is such that the re-gambling process is performed, the game can be advanced in the same flow as the game after the other small winning combination result or the out-of-game result. In addition, by utilizing the fact that the player is given an impression different from that after the replay result, which is the same as after the other small role result or the missed result, for example, a specific replay result can be used as another small role result. It is also possible to enhance the effect of giving the impression that the treatment is the same as the result of the deviation, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of the game.

Feature G2. The bet number setting means sets the first bet number when the bet number operation is performed by the first bet number operation means, and the bet number operation is performed by the second bet number operation means. In some cases, a second number of bets different from the first number is set.
The first notification mode is a notification mode of the specific notification that enables the first number of the bet number correspondence notification to be performed.
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the second notification mode is a notification mode of the specific notification that enables the second number to perform the bet number correspondence notification.

According to the above configuration, even after the bet number has already been set as the re-game state after the specific re-game result, the first bet number operating means is operated to obtain the first bet number. It is possible to give the player the impression that it is possible to set the number of bets or set the number of bets of the second number by operating the second bet number operating means. By doing so, it is possible to help give the impression that a specific re-game result is treated in the same way as other small-role results and out-of-game results, and it is possible to use it to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G3. When the specific notification of the first notification mode is executed by the first specific notification means, the means (display control device 81) for performing the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the first number of bets. A function to execute the specific re-game bet effect setting process) and
When the specific notification of the second notification mode is executed by the second specific notification means, the means (display control device 81) so as to perform the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the second number of bets. A function to execute a single bet effect setting process based on a specific input command or a specific second operation command in the specific replay bet effect setting process) and
The gaming machine according to the feature G2, which is characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, when the first bet number operation means or the second bet number operation means is operated in the re-game state after the specific re-game result, not only the notification mode of the specific notification but also the bet number correspondence notification is usually performed. It will be notified as corresponding to the number of bets at the time. By doing so, although the specific notification up to the bet number correspondence notification corresponds to each bet number operation means, the bet number correspondence notification itself is the bet number already set in the specific replay state. It is possible to prevent the inconsistency of the production such as the one corresponding to the above.

Features G4. In a situation where the specific notification of the first notification mode is executed by the first specific notification means and the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the first number of bets is performed, or the second specific notification means. When the start operation means is operated in a situation where the specific notification of the second notification mode is executed and the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the second number of bets is performed, the said A means for switching the bet number correspondence notification to the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the replay state (a function of executing a process for performing a bet correspondence effect in the pseudo bet effect by the display control device 81. The gaming machine according to feature G3, which comprises (see FIG. 85 (c)).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the bet number is already set as the replay state, it is possible to perform a pseudo bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the operation of each bet number operation means, but the start operation. When the means is operated, by switching to the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set as the replay state, the rotation of the orbiting body is started, but this time. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player cannot grasp the number of bets provided by the lottery means.

Feature G5. The specific notification of the first notification mode is being executed by the first specific notification means, or the specific notification of the second notification mode is being executed by the second specific notification means. When the start operation means is operated, the means for switching the bet number correspondence notification to the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the replay state (bet in the pseudo bet effect by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature G3 or feature G4, which is provided with a function of executing a process of switching to a bet-compatible effect during a process effect (see FIG. 85 (c)).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the bet number is already set as the replay state, the pseudo bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the operation of each bet number operation means can be performed, but the pseudo bet number correspondence notification is performed. If the start operation means is operated before reaching the target bet number correspondence notification, the orbiting body can be switched to the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set as the replay state. Even though the rotation has started, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player cannot grasp the number of bets given by the lottery means this time.

Feature G6. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification including a first specific notification (lighting effect) as the specific notification and a second specific notification (bet time sound effect effect) different from the first specific notification. can be,
The specific notification in the first notification mode by the first specific notification means includes the first specific notification and the second specific notification, while the second notification mode by the second specific notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the specific notification is an embodiment that does not include the first specific notification and includes the second specific notification.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the first notification mode and the second notification mode is whether or not the first specific notification is included, and whether or not a part of the specific notification is executed in this way. With a relatively simple configuration such as making them different, it is possible to expect the excellent effect of the feature G1.

Feature G7. A game value input means (medal insertion slot 45) in which the game value is input by the player, and
A game value input grasping means (input medal detection sensor 45a) for grasping that a game value has been input to the game value input means, and
Equipped with
The game value input grasping means is any one of the features G1 to G6, which is characterized in that when it grasps that the game value has been input, it grasps that the bet number operation by the second bet number operation means has been executed. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the operation of the second bet number operating means is performed when the game value is input by the player in the re-game state set based on the specific re-game result. Specific notification in the notification mode is executed. That is, the configuration is such that the game value can be input even in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result, and further, the bet number can be set by inputting the game value. It can help give the player the impression that a particular re-gaming result is equivalent to other small-role results and the like.

Features G8. Equipped with a virtual game value storage means (credit counter) that stores virtual game values up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers.
When the virtual game value of the first number corresponding to the bet number set when the first bet number operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the first bet number operation means The configuration is such that the first bet number is set based on the operation.
The second specific notification means is a virtual game value storage means based on the bet number operation by the second bet number operation means when the regame process is performed based on the specific regame result. The gaming machine according to feature G7, characterized in that it is possible to increase the number of stored game values and execute the specific notification according to the second notification mode.

According to the above configuration, when the game value is input from the game value input means in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result, not only the specific notification is performed by the pseudo second notification mode but also the virtual game value is performed. It is possible to increase the number of storages of the storage means. By doing so, it seems as if it is possible to set the bet number by inputting the virtual game value in a specific re-game state, but the game value is costly for such a pseudo specific notification. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as being killed.

Feature G9. The bet number set by the bet number operation by the second bet number operation means may be different from the bet number set in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result.
The second specific notification means is specified by the second notification mode based on the bet number operation by the second bet number operation means when the regame process is performed based on the specific regame result. In addition to executing the notification, the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game process is executed (in the specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81, the bet-corresponding effect is performed based on the specific input command. (See FIG. 85 (d)), a function for executing a process for performing the bet number operation, and when the bet number operation by the second bet number operation means is further executed in the situation where the bet number correspondence notification is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, wherein a predetermined notification (credit increase effect sound, FIG. 85A) can be executed without updating the bet number correspondence notification. ..

According to the above configuration, when the bet number operation is performed by the second bet number operation means in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result, the bet number correspondence notification is performed together with the specific notification by the second notification mode, and then the bet number correspondence notification is performed. Further, when the bet number operation is performed by the second bet number operation means, only the predetermined notification is performed without updating the bet number correspondence notification. In this way, in the re-gambling state based on the specific re-gambling result, the specific notification by the betting number operation of the second betting number operating means is performed, and the betting number is not the betting number by the betting number operation of the second betting number operating means, but the re-gambling. By making it possible to notify the bet number corresponding to the bet number set in the game state, it is possible to clearly grasp that the bet number operation by the second bet number operation means has been accepted, but it is regular. It is also possible to grasp the number of bets. Then, when the bet number operation is performed again by the second bet number operation means, if the bet number correspondence notification is not updated, the impression that the bet number correspondence notification is legitimate. It is also possible to know that the bet number operation has been accepted even if the update is not performed, because the predetermined notification is also performed at the time of the bet number operation. Therefore, when the bet number set by the bet number operation of the second bet number operation means and the bet number in the replay state are different, the inconsistency or inconvenience of notification to the bet number operation by the second bet number operation means is preferable. It becomes possible to solve the problem.

The invention described in the above features G1 to G9 states, "Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. It is known that the player is given a privilege according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the start lever is placed in a situation where a medal as a game value is bet on a slot machine. When operated, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technique that "if it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "the game illustrated above here, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features G1 to G9, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed. Drive control means (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A bet number operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) in which an operation for setting a game bet number is performed, and
When the bet number operation means is operated, the bet number setting means (a function of executing the first operation correspondence process and the second operation correspondence process by the main control device 101) for setting the bet number of the game, and
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player according to a bet number set by the bet number setting means based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101). When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
To perform a bet process effect in the bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81, which can execute a specific notification (bet time effect such as a bet process effect) when the bet number operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
The bet number notification means (display control device 81 is used to execute the bet time effect setting process) for executing the bet number correspondence notification (bet correspondence effect) corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means by the predetermined notification means. Function) and
When the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is executed, the specific means (freeze by the main control device 101) capable of restricting the execution of the start drive control based on the operation of the start operation means. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a process of setting a second freeze flag in the case of a start operation during a betting process effect in a replay state based on a specific replay result in a lottery process).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of The bet number correspondence notification is performed by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is assumed that the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, and the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation. Execution of start drive control is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to suitably avoid the event that the specific notification and the start of rotation of the orbiting body overlap, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the duplication of the effect and the processing.

Feature H2. The second freeze effect is executed by the rotation effect process by the specific drive control means (main control device 101) capable of executing the specific drive control so as to perform the specific operation (second freeze effect) as the game effect using the orbiting body. Function to do)
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the specific drive control means can execute the specific drive control when the execution of the start drive control is restricted by the specific means.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification and the start of rotation of the orbiting body overlap, a specific operation as a game effect using the orbiting body such as a so-called freeze effect is executed. By using such a specific operation, even if the specific notification and the start of rotation of the orbiting body overlap, it is possible to accept them without discomfort, and even the time waiting for the start of rotation of the orbiting body is lapped. It becomes possible to pay attention to the movement of the body, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

The configuration may be added to the configuration that "the drive control means can execute the start drive control after the specific drive control by the specific drive control means is completed".

Feature H3. It is provided with an execution lottery means (a function of executing a freeze lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing an execution lottery for executing the specific drive control by the specific drive control means based on the lottery result by the lottery means.
The specific means can perform the specific drive control even if the result of the execution lottery by the execution lottery means is different from the result corresponding to the execution of the specific drive control. The gaming machine according to the feature H2.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the execution lottery of the specific operation is performed based on the lottery result by the lottery means, even if the execution lottery of the specific operation is not won, the specific notification and the start of rotation of the orbiting body overlap. If so, it is possible to perform a specific operation. By doing so, it becomes clearer that it is not a configuration in which a specific operation is accidentally performed when the specific notification and the rotation start overlap.

Features H4. It is provided with an advantage determination means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) for executing an advantage determination that causes an advantageous event for the player based on the lottery result by the lottery means.
In the advantageous determination means, the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (specific combination) is different from the case where the second result (normal combination) is different from the first result. The advantageous determination is executed so that the result of the above is likely to be the result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event.
The execution lottery means corresponds to the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, and the result of the execution lottery executes the specific drive control, as compared with the case where the lottery result is the second result. The gaming machine according to feature H3, characterized in that the execution lottery is executed so as to easily result in the above-mentioned execution lottery.

According to the above configuration, the execution rate of a specific action and the occurrence rate of an advantageous event are clearly related. By doing so, it becomes possible to pay attention to the occurrence of a specific motion by utilizing the psychology of the player who expects an advantageous event, thereby specifying when the specific notification and the start of rotation overlap. When an action is performed, it can be accepted without discomfort and can be noticed with great expectation.

Feature H5. The specific notification means is characterized in that the specific notification can be terminated before the specific drive control by the specific drive control means is terminated (see FIG. 83 (d)). The gaming machine according to any one of H2 to H4.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification ends before the specific operation ends, the start drive control and the specific notification overlap even though the start drive control is restricted and the specific operation is performed. It is possible to suitably avoid the inconvenience that the problem is not solved.

Feature H6. When the execution of the start drive control is restricted by the specific drive control means, the specific drive control means stops the orbiting body and delays the start of rotation of the orbiting body by the start drive control. The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H5, characterized in that the specific drive control is executed so as to perform an operation.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the orbiter does not rotate in the specific operation. By doing so, the specific notification and the operation of the orbiting body do not overlap, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to the duplication of processing.

Feature H7. For the rotation effect processing by the first specific drive control means (main control device 101) capable of executing the first specific drive control so as to perform the first specific operation (first freeze effect) as the game effect including the rotation of the orbiting body. (Function to execute the first freeze effect) and
A second specific drive control means (rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a second specific drive control so as to perform a second specific operation (second freeze effect) as a game operation that does not include rotation of the orbiting body. (Function to execute the second freeze effect) and
Equipped with
In the specific situation, when the start operation means is operated and the first specific drive control is performed by the first specific drive control means based on the operation of the start operation means, the specific notification can be restricted. It is equipped with a specific restriction means (a function of executing a process of switching a bet process effect to a bet-compatible effect based on the first freeze command in the specific replay bet effect setting process by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H6.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific operation including the rotation of the orbiting body and the specific notification overlap, the specific notification side is restricted. In this way, the configuration is such that the specific notification based on the operation of the betting number operation means is not performed until the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped, and the first specific operation due to the rotation of the orbiting body is prioritized. , It is possible to suppress a high load on the drive unit due to a sudden change in the drive control of the orbiting body.

The invention described in the above features H1 to H7 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. It is known that the player is given a privilege according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the start lever is placed in a situation where a medal as a game value is bet on a slot machine. When operated, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Regarding the background technique that "if it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", "the game illustrated above here, etc." It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features H1 to H7, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature H group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature H group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol row, and the symbol fluctuation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc., and is provided with a throwing device that takes in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32 ... Reel as an orbiter, 41 ... Start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44 ... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64 ... Speakers constituting an auxiliary production unit, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting the auxiliary effect unit, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 ... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (7)

Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each orbital body, and
A start operation means for performing a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiters, and a start operation means.
A stop operation means for performing a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiters, and a stop operation means.
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. The drive control means to be executed and
A bet number operation means for performing a bet number operation for setting a game bet number, and
A bet number setting means for setting a game bet number based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, and a bet number setting means.
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player according to a bet number set by the bet number setting means based on the operation of the start operation means, and a lottery means.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
After executing the specific notification when the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed, the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set based on the bet number operation is executed by the specific notification means. Number notification means and
It is characterized by comprising a specific processing means for executing a specific process that can limit the executed specific notification when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is executed. A game machine. The specific processing means is characterized in that it can execute a specific process for limiting the execution of at least a part of the specific notification based on the operation of the start operation means in the specific situation. The gaming machine described in. The claim is characterized in that the bet number notification means can execute the bet number correspondence notification based on the limitation of the specific notification by the specific processing by the specific processing means. 1 or the gaming machine according to claim 2. When the start drive control is performed by the drive control means based on the operation of the start operation means, the start notification means capable of executing the start notification by a predetermined notification means is provided.
The specific processing means executes the specific processing when the predetermined start notification is performed by the start notification means based on the operation of the start operation means in the specific situation, while the specific start notification means performs the predetermined start. Claims 1 to 1, wherein the specific process can be prevented from being executed when the notification is not performed or when the predetermined start notification by the start notification means and the specific notification do not overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of 3. A start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control from the start of the start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses.
When the start operation means is operated in the specific situation before the lapse of the specific period, the permissible means capable of permitting the execution of the specific notification and the permissible means.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the gaming machine is provided with. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a re-game result and the pattern combination corresponding to the re-game result is stopped at the effective position, the number of bets on which the lottery by the lottery means which is the re-game result is performed. In the re-game state in which the same number of bets as the above is set, the re-game setting means for executing the re-game process that enables the lottery by the lottery means to be received again is provided.
When the re-game process is performed based on the specific re-game result, the bet number notification means executes the specific notification based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, and then performs the re-game process. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising a specific bet number notification means capable of executing the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set. In the privilege granting means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-gambling result and the pattern combination corresponding to the re-gambling result is stopped at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the re-gambling result is the re-gambling. It is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again in the re-gambling state in which the same number of bets as the number of bets made by the lottery means as the game result is set by the bet number setting means. Equipped with a re-gambling setting means to execute the re-gambling process
The bet number notification means is the bet when the re-game process is performed based on the special re-game result, and if the situation resulting in the special re-game result is a predetermined special situation. After executing the specific notification based on the bet number operation of the number operation means, it is possible to execute the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game process, while the special re-game. If the resulting situation is different from the special situation, the bet number set in the re-gambling process after executing the specific notification without going through the bet number operation of the bet number operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, further comprising a special bet number notification means capable of executing the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the above.

Images